Ingles 7° Grado

ENGLISH
Unit 1
Meeting NEW PEOPLE
Objectives:
At the end of the unit you will be able to:
Understand vocabulary related to introductions, greetings, names,
numbers and courtesy expressions by listening.
Produce spoken and written texts related to introductions, greetings,
names, numbers, and courtesy expressions.
Demonstrate effective use of intended vocabulary and structures in
order to describe characteristics and location of office objects both
orally and written.
Talk about personal office belongings using demonstrative adjectives
in order to exchange opinions about coworkers’ possessions.
Give and follow commands showing courtesy and respect in order
to communicate within the job setting.
Unit 1
Meeting
new people
Listening Grammar
Speaking Vocabulary
Reading Pronunciation
Writing
Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Lesson 4 Lesson 5

Introductions and The alphabet Telephone Colors, Common
simple greetings and courtesy numbers and possesions commands at
expressions numbers from and personal items work and home
0 to100
Unit guidelines
In this unit you will be able to greet people in different ways. It is important to tell the difference between formal
and informal greetings so that you can greet people according to the context or situation you are in. Remember that
you have to learn the alphabet in order to spell words as well as know the numbers from zero to one hundred. As an
independent learner, it is recommended that you keep track of your own learning progress.
Introduction: Hands on!

In this unit you will work on the first part of a project called “ Filling out a job application from” part I. This project
focuses on the section of a job application form, including personal information, availability, education background,
employment history, and personal references. This project is beneficial to anyone who wants to work outside of their
home. By the end of unit 1, you will be able to fill out the personal information section of a job application form. The
project will continue in unit 2.
Look at the following URL to print a sample job application form and begin the project:
http://jobsearch.aboutk.com/ od/ jobappsample/a/printableapp.htm.
192 English - Seventh Grade

Unit One Lesson 1
How are you?
Getting started!
¿Conoces cuáles son las formas más comunes de saludar a
las personas en Inglés?
¿Cómo te presentas ante las demás personas en Inglés?
¿Qué haces cuando te presentan a otras personas?
¿Cómo se dicen los diferentes saludos formales e
informales en Inglés?
¿Qué información puedes solicitar o brindar cuando
conoces a alguien por primera vez?
Achievement indicators
I can identify greetings and courtesy expressions in a I can exchange greetings and courtesy expressions in dialogues.
simple text.
Which of the following are greetings?

1. Hi 2. Office 3. Hello 4. Good morning 5. Good afternoon 6. How are you? 7. Sister 8. Nice to meet you
Conversation and more

Listen to and read the following conversation and identify
Activity 1
the greetings. Look up any new words in a dictionary. Answer the following questions.
A: Hi. How are you, María? 1. How is María?
B: Hello. I am fine. Thank you. And you?
2. How is Mario?
A: I am okay.
B: By the way, how is your sister Karla? 3. How is Mario’s sister Karla?
A: Oh! She is not bad. She is in La Paz.
B: Good! I’ll see you later.
A: Okay. Bye.
Don’t forget!
There are formal and informal greetings in English. “How

do you do?” is a very formal greeting which means “hello.”
But the expressions “How are you doing?” and “What’s going
on?” are informal greetings which mean “How are you?”
Glossary: By the way: used to introduce another topic.

Not bad: all right or acceptable.
Seventh Grade - English 193

UNIT 1
Enrich your vocabulary Activity 2

Greetings
When you meet people or introduce yourself to others, Listen to and read the following conversations carefully
you usually ask for or provide the following information: and identify all of the greetings.
your first name and last name, your occupation, the name Conversation 1
of the place where you live or work, and your age.
Here is a list of some of the most common expressions A: Hi! Good morning. My name is César. How are you?
used to greet people or introduce yourself in English. B: Good morning. I am fine, thanks. My name is
Listen to and repeat each short dialogue. Roberto. It’s nice to meet you.
A: Nice to meet you, too.
1. A: Hi, Peter. B: Are you Mr. González?
B: Good morning, John. A: Yes, I am Cesar González.
B: I am your new coworker. I am the new carpenter.
2. A: Good afternoon, Mary. A: Hey! I am glad to hear that. Welcome to
B: Good afternoon, Mario. the company.
B: Thank you very much.
3. A: How do you do?
B: Fine thanks.
4. A: How are you?

B: I am fine.
5. A: What is your name?

B: My name is Saúl.
6. A: What is your last name?

B: My last name is Vásquez.
Conversation 2
7. A: Nice to meet you.
B: Nice to meet you, too. A: Good afternoon. My name is Mary. I am the new
secretary.
8. A: Where are you from? B: Hello, Mary. My name is Marta. It’s nice to
B: I am from Ilobasco. meet you.
A: I am glad to meet you, too. Where is my desk?
B: That is your desk.
A: Thank you so much. Where do you live, Mary?
B: I live in San Miguel. How about you?
What for? A: I live in San Vicente.
When you find yourself among people you

don’t know, you may want to introduce yourself
and tell a few things about yourself. If you want
to introduce yourself, you should start the
conversation by greeting someone and telling
them your name: Hello. My name is Rolando…
Glossary:
Glad: happy.

UNIT 1
Time to read Conversation and more

Listen to and read the following paragraph about greetings Listen to and read the following conversation between
carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary. two friends carefully and identify the kinds of greetings
they use. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
A: What’s up, Paula?

B: Hi. Luis. Good morning.
A: Good morning.
B: I am so happy today.
A: Why? What’s new?
B: Well, I have an important meeting.
A: Where?
B: In my house.
A: In your house! Who is the meeting with in
your house?
A handshake is the customary greeting in El Salvador, but B: My two brothers who live in the United States.
sometimes a slight nod of the head is also used. The use A: Hey! I am happy for you. Say hello to your brothers
of titles shows respect, which is particularly important for me.
when greeting older people. The first name or family B: Of course! See you soon.
name alone is used only among close acquaintances. A: Ok. Good bye.
Placing an arm around the shoulders of another is a
common way to show friendship, and friends often stand
very close when conversing. Friends who have not seen
each other in a while may exchange hugs. Common
greetings include: good day, good morning, good
afternoon, and good evening.
3 Activity
Choose the letter that best answers the following questions

based on the paragraph.
1. Which is a customary greeting in El Salvador?
A. a handshake Activity 4
B. a kiss on the cheek
Choose the letter that best answers the following questions.
2. Which is a common greeting? 1. What does Paula have?
A. good morning A. a dinner
B. bye B. an important meeting
2. Who is in Paula’s house?

Hands on! 1A A. her brothers
B. her sisters
Job application forms always begin with a section
containing personal information. Formal English 3. Who is happy today?
should be used. Make sure to give your complete
name with your title. Which title will you use? A. Paula
B. Luis
Glossary:
Meeting: a place, a time and a purpose to come together.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully.
Activity 5
Look up any new words in a dictionary. Decide whether the following statements are true or false based
on conversation 1.
1. Lola lives in Sonsonate.
2. Sofia works in a supermarket.
3. Lola works in a bank.
Activity 6
Choose the letter that best answers the questions about
conversation 2.
Conversation 1 1. What is Mr. Martínez’s occupation?
A: Good evening. I am Sofia. I live in Sonsonate. How A. He is a doctor.
about you? B. He is a teacher.
B: Hi. I am Lola, and I live in Santa Ana.
A: Where do you work? 2. Where does Mr. López live?
B: I work in a restaurant. And you? A. He lives in San Salvador.
A: I work in a supermarket. It was nice to meet you. B. He lives in La Palma.
B: It was nice meeting you, too.
3. Is Mr. Martinez from Usulután?
A. No, he is not.
B. Yes, he is.
Activity 7
Put the following statements in the correct order to make a
complete and logical conversation.
__ Hello. My name is Carlos.
Conversation 2 __ Hi. My name is Manuel. What is your name?
A: Good morning, Mrs. López.
__ Nice to meet you, too, Manuel.
B: Good morning, Mr. Martínez. How are you?
A: I’m fine thanks, and you? __ Nice to meet you, Carlos.
B: Not bad. Mr. Martínez, this is my husband Miguel.
Miguel, this is Mr. Martínez my English teacher.
C: Pleased to meet you, Mr. Martínez. Don’t forget!
A: Pleased to meet you, too. Are you from
Chalatenango, Mr. López?
C: Yes, I live in La Palma. And you? “How about you?” “And you?” and “What about you?” are
A: I’m from Santa Elena, Usulután, but I live in questions used after responding to a previous question.
San Salvador now.
Glossary: Husband: partner in a married woman’s life.
And you?: How about you?
Mr. and Mrs.: titles for a man and a married woman.

UNIT 1
Enrich your vocabulary

In the English language there are a series of greetings
which people use depending on the context. Study the
Activity 8
following tables about formal and informal greetings. Which of the following conversations are formal or informal?
Classify them as “Formal” or “Informal”.
Formal greetings: Informal greetings:
arrival arrival
Good morning / Conversation 1
Hi. / Hello.
afternoon / evening. A: Hello, David.
Hello (name), B: Hello, Claudia.
How are you?
how are you?
A: How are you?
Good day, Sir / Madam. What's up? B: I am fine, thank you.
How are you doing?
It’s important to note that the questions “How are you?” Conversation 2
or “What’s up?” don’t necessarily need a response. If you
A: Hi, Susan.
do respond, these phrases are generally expected:
B: Hello, Julie.
1. Very well, thank you. And you? (formal) A: What’s up?
2. Fine. / Great. (informal) No response is
B: Nothing.
also acceptable.
Formal greetings: Informal greetings: Conversation 3

departure departure A: Good morning,
Have a good day/ Claudia.
morning/afternoon/ Goodbye. / Bye. B: Good morning,
evening. Mr. Ayala.
It was a pleasure to See you. / See you later. A: How are you?
meet/to see you. (informal)
B: Very well, thank you.
See you soon.
Goodbye. Note: After 8 p.m.
Goodnight.
Conversation 4
A: Claudia, this is
Jaime Cortez.
B: Hi, Jaime.
What for?
C: Nice to meet you,
Claudia.
Last names, also called surnames, are used
to express your family name. It is important
to recognize this personal information on
application forms.
Activity 9
Write two original conversations using formal and
informal greetings.

UNIT 1
Language in use
Personal pronouns include subject pronouns. These take the place of a noun subject. The following table includes the
conjugation of the verb “be” in the present tense with the subject pronouns.
Read and study the table below:
Subject Verb in a question Contractions Verb in a question

pronouns
I I am fine thanks. I'm I’m not Am I all right?
you You are my friend. you're you aren’t Are you from La Union?
he He is a student. he's he isn’t Is he a student?
she She is okay. she's she isn’t Is she your sister?
it It is good. it's it isn’t Is it a book?
we We are from La Paz. we’re we aren’t Are we friends?
you You are not bad. you’re you aren’t Are you okay?
they They are perfect. they’re they aren’t Are they students?
Question words usually begin with the letters Wh- and ask for specific information:
What …? is used for things, Who…? is used for people, Where…? is used for places, When…? is used for time,
Why…? is used for reason, and How…? is used for manner.
The following table shows how to put question words in the contracted form with the verb “be”:
Question word + “be” Contraction Question word + “be” Contraction

What is What’s When is When’s
Who is Who’s How is How’s
Where is Where’s Why is Why’s
10 Activity Activity 11
Complete the following sentences with the correct form of Complete the following questions with the correct
the verb “be”. question words.
1. He __ a teacher. 1. __ is your name?

2. You __ from San Salvador. 2. __ are you from?
3. I __ fine. Thank you. 3. __ is in your house?
4. We __ not classmates. 4. __ are your glasses?
5. It __ my favorite color. 5. __ are you today?

UNIT 1
Complete the following questions with the correct form of the
verb “be”. Listen to two short dialogues carefully and fill in the
blanks to complete the following statements.
1. How __ you today? I am fine. Thank you.
Conversation 1
2. What __ your last name? It’s Guzman.
1. The man’s name is __.
3. __ you from La Union? No, I’m not.
2. The woman’s name is __.
Conversation 2
13 Activity 1. The woman’s last name is __.
2. The man’s family name is __.
Listen to the following conversations and fill in

the blanks with the missing words. Then practice these
conversations by reading and pronouncing each Activity 15
statement carefully.
Conversation 1 Listen to and repeat each statement carefully. Then
write possible responses.
A: Excuse me, are __ Jacqueline White?
1. Hi.
B: Yes, that’s __.
2. Hello.
A: May I __ myself? I’m Mariano Pérez. How do
3. How are you?
you do?
4. What’s up?
B: __, Mr. Pérez.
5. How are you doing?
6. Goodbye.
Conversation 2
A: Daniel! Good to see you again. __ are things?

B: Hello, Luisa. Fine, thanks. Let me introduce you to Lesson core
Peter Wild.
Peter, this is Luisa Falcon. Conociste las diferentes formas de saludar
C: Nice to meet you, Mrs. Falcon. las personas en Inglés. Escuchaste y utilizaste
A: Nice to meet you, too. __, call me Luisa. saludos formales y saludos informales. Además,
C: Then you __ call me Peter. estudiaste diferentes pronombres personales con
sus respectivas formas afirmativas y negativas
del verbo ser o estar. También, practicaste como
escribir y utilizar las preguntas de información
escribiendo interrogaciones y respondiéndolas,
utilizando tu información personal.

UNIT 1
Self evaluation
Choose the letter or letters that best answer each question.
1 Which is a formal greeting?

a) How do you do? 3 What does “How do you do?” mean?
a) What’s your name?
b) What’s up? b) Hello
c) My last name is Guzman. c) Last name
d) Hi! d) Occupation
2 Which is an informal greeting?

a) Hello! 4 Which questions are used to ask
someone’s last name?
b) What’s new? a) What is your family name?
c) How are you? b) What is your name?
d) Nice to meet you. c) What is your surname?

d) How is your family?
4. a, c 3. b 2. b 1. a Answers:
GREETINGS
Greetings are very important for socializing
and meeting other people who surround you.
Greetings can vary from country to country
or from region to region. In some countries
physical contact, such as hugs or kisses, is
avoided. In other countries, such as the ones in
Latin America, these gestures are given among
people who have already met before and who
know one another well. In Oriental countries
people greet each other with a bow or inclination
of their heads. In other countries, like France,
men and women give one another a kiss on
each cheek. So be careful about the culture and
customs of the people whom you are going to
meet and greet in the future.

Unit One Lesson 2
Could you spell your name?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son las formas más comunes para expresar
cortesía a otras personas en Inglés?
¿Cómo deletreas tus nombres o tus apellidos en Inglés?
¿Cómo preguntas a las demás personas para que te
deletreen las palabras que no conoces en Inglés?
¿Cómo se pronuncian las diferentes vocales y
consonantes en el alfabeto del idioma Inglés?
¿Cómo se llena un formulario en la parte relacionada
a nombres y apellidos en Inglés?
I can tell the difference between the consonant and vowels sounds in I can clearly spell first and last names in both speaking and writing.
naturally spoken speech. I can ask questions to confirm spelling.
Which of the following are vowels and which are consonants?
1. A 2. B 3. E 4. F 5. I 6. H 7. O 8. M 9. U 10. Y Conversation 2
A: Good afternoon.
B: Good afternoon.
Conversation and more My name is Roxana.
Listen to and read the following conversations in a A: Ok. Excuse me. What is
receptionist’s office. Identify all greetings and then practice the your last name?
dialogues by reading them out loud. Look up any new words in B: My last name is Hercules.
a dictionary. A: Sorry. Could you spell
your last name, please?
Conversation 1 B: It’s H-E-R-C-U-L-E-S.
A: Good morning. A: Is that H-E-R-C-U-L-E-S?
B: Good morning. Excuse me. What is your name? B: Yes. That’s right.
A: My name is Yohalma.
B: Could you spell your name, please?
A: Yes. No problem. It’s
Y-O-H-A-L-M-A. Don’t forget!
B: Let me see. Is it Y-O-
J-A-L-M-A? In the English alphabet there are 5 vowels and 21
A: No. It’s with an H
consonants. The consonant “ñ” does not exist in English
and not with a J. It’s and neither do “ll” nor “rr”.
Y-O-H-A-L-M-A.
B: Thank you very much!
A: You’re welcome.

UNIT 1

The English language alphabet
Activity 2
Listen to and repeat each letter several times.
A B C D E F G
Listen carefully to the spelling of the following names
and choose the correct answer.
1. Kris/ Chris
H I J K L M N 2.
3.
Carla/ Karla
Orlando/ Rolando
O P Q R S T 4.
5.
Sara / Sarai
Jessica/ Yessica
U V W X Y Z Activity 3
AEIOU 1.
Listen carefully to the spelling of the last names and
choose the correct answer.
Aguilar/ Aguilera
Practice these vowels several times until you can 2. Potter/ Porter
pronounce and distinguish them.
3. Henríquez/ Enrique
4. Payes/ Pérez
1 Activity 5. Ruiz/ Ruis
There are different ways to ask someone to spell a word
or words. Here are some expressions that you can use.
Study the following table:
Listen carefully to the following consonants and
choose the correct letter. Can you spell your name, It’s M-A-R-Í-A.
please?
1. B/ P Could you spell your last
2. C/ Z name? It’s V-A-S-Q-U-E-Z.
3. H/ J Can you spell that, please? M-E-E-T-I-N-G.
4. M/ N How do you spell your family G-U-T-I-E-R-R-E-Z.
5. W/ V name?
Could you spell it, please? It’s S-U-R-N-A-M-E.
What for?
To ask how a word is spelled in English, you must first know the
English alphabet. You may ask about the spelling of a word politely
using the auxiliaries can, could or would. For example: Could you spell
your last name, please? or Would you spell your first name, please?

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following passage carefully. Look Listen to and read the followong short conversations.
up any new words in a dictionary. Identify of all the courtesy expressions. Then practice
them out loud.
Conversation 1
A: Can I see your driver’s license, please?
B: Sure. No problem. Here you are.
To be polite in English you have to use courtesy A: Everything is ok. Thank you, sir. I really appreciate
expressions according to the people, context and your cooperation.
situation you are in. Otherwise, you will sound rude or B: You’re welcome.
impolite. In most cases, Salvadorans are polite, and they
often use expressions of courtesy when asking someone Conversation 2
for information. Some examples of these statements
A: Excuse me, Miss. Could
might include: Thanks a lot, thank you so much, please,
sorry, pardon me, and excuse me. Are you a polite you spell your name,
person? What courtesy expressions do you usually use? again?
B: It’s A-N-D-R-E-A.
A: Thank you so much.
4 Activity B: Don’t mention it.
Decide whether the following statements are true or false

Conversation 3
A: Good evening. May I
according to the passage above. have your name, please?
1. Courtesy expressions are used according B: Yes. My name is Iris.
to context. A: How do you spell that?
2. An example of a courtesy expression is “pardon me”. B: I-R-I-S.
3. To be polite in English you must use A: Sorry. Could you spell it
again, please?
courtesy expressions.
B: It’s I-R-I-S.
4. If you don’t use courtesy expressions, you
A: Thanks a lot.
sound rude.
Don’t forget!
5 Activity
When asking someone for help, you should do it politely
so that people will be willing to help. For example, “I don’t
Write two conversations using courtesy expressions and two understand how to complete section two of this form.
conversations asking people to spell their first and last names. Will you help me, please?” Keep in mind that to complete
your project you have to ask others for help politely.
Glossary:
Courtesy: good manners or politeness.
Rude: offensive or vulgar.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully. Which expressions of courtesy are used?
Conversation 1 Conversation 2
A: May I have your attention, please? A: May I help you?
B: Sure. B: Yes, please. What is the meaning of family name?
A: I want you to fill out this form. A: Family name is your last name or surname. It is
B: Excuse me. What does fill out mean? your father’s last name.
A: Oh. Okay. Fill out means to complete. In this case, B: Thanks. May I ask you another question?
complete this form using a black pen. A: Of course. Go ahead.
B: Thank you very much. You are so polite. B: What does marital status mean?
A: Don’t mention it! After you finish completing your A: Well, marital status is if you are single, married,
application form, please give it to the receptionist. or divorced.
B: Oh yeah! I got it now. Thanks a lot.
A: You’re welcome.
Choose the letter that best answers the following questions Choose the letter that best answers the following questions
based on conversation 1. about conversation 2.
1. What does fill out mean? 1. What is the meaning of “family name”?
A. To send. A. your first name
B. To complete. B. your last name
2. What kind of a form is it? 2. What does “marital status” mean?

A. an application form. A. if you are married or not
B. a letter. B. if you are happy or not
3. Who receives the applications?

A. anybody
B. the receptionist
Glossary: Go ahead: continue to do or say something.

What does….mean?: the correct way to ask the meaning of something. I got it: I understand or it is clear now.
Application form: a form to apply for a job.
Give: to present to.

UNIT 1

Courtesy expressions
This list includes courtesy formulas of everyday usage, Choose the letter that best answers the following questions.
plus a few that are becoming obsolete. These expressions
can be used in formal and informal situations. 1. May I come in?
A. Thank you.
Listen to and study the following expressions carefully: B. Yes, please come in.
English expressions of courtesy
2. Thank you very much.
Enjoy your stay. Do you mind
my smoking? A. Don’t mention it.
B. Thank you.
All the best. Excuse me.
Don’t mention it. Don’t bother. 3. Does it bother you if I open the door?
Take your time. Sorry. A. Not at all.
My pleasure. Please. B. My respect.
Does it bother you if Not at all.
...I open the window? 4. May I help you?
May I? May I come in? A. My pleasure.
Doesn’t matter. It would be a pleasure. B. Yes, please.
Be my guest. May I help you?
5. Could you spell it again?
Would you like (a cup Please come in.
of coffee/ a drink)? A. Please come in.
B. Yes, no problem.
Thank you! I beg your pardon.
You’re welcome. Don’t be shy.
Activity 9
Look at the following courtesy statements and questions. Put
What for? the words into the correct order.
1. stay /your/ enjoy
Informal greetings and introductions are used in
informal settings: when meeting and introducing 2. in /please /come
friends, relatives and acquaintances. Express 3. like /would /a /you/ drink/ ?
these kinds of greeting when making friends or 4. you/ please/ name/ could/ your/ spell/ ?
meeting new people at parties or family reunions.
5. help/ I/ may/ you/ ?
Hands on! 1B
When filling out an application form, always

double check the information you wrote down and
the spelling to make sure it is correct. Companies
don’t want to hire people who don’t pay attention
to details.

UNIT 1
Language in use
A. To ask for something politely in English you can B. When addressing people, titles are used to be
use the following questions: polite and show respect. The following table shows
a list of common titles:
Auxiliary Subject Complement
Title Pronunciation Explanation Example
May I help you?
Could you spell that? Adult male
Mr. (Mister) (married or Mr. Alas
Can he spell her last name? unmarried)
Would you mind if I smoke? Young or adult
Miss (Miss) Miss Pacas
May I come in? female (single)
Do you mind if they come? Mrs. (Misses) Female (married) Mrs. Parker
Can you help me? Female
(married or single) Ms. Perez
Ms. (Mizz)
Note: Often used
in business.
10 Activity
Activity 12
Now that you know different ways of expressing gratitude in
English, write two short conversations using expressions of Decide whether the following statements are true or false
courtesy. Use some of the expressions provided above. according to the table above.
1. Mr. is used when you are addressing a little boy.
11 Activity
2. Mrs. is used when you are addressing a single woman.
3. Ms. is used when you are addressing a married woman.
4. Miss is used when you are addressing a single woman.
Complete the following sentences with the correct form of
the verb “be”.
1. He __ a teacher.
2.
3.
You __ from San Salvador.
I __ fine. Thank you.
Activity 13
4. We __ not classmates.
5. It __ my favorite color.
Listen carefully to the following sentences and fill in
the blanks with the appropriate title.
1. Good morning, __ Lima.
What for? 2. Good afternoon, __ Sierra.
3. Hello, __ Perla.
When completing a form, you should know what
male or female means as well as be able to write
your title. You should also know your spouse’s
name and other personal information.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following conversation and
Activity 14
practice it by repeating it out loud. Look up any new Choose the letter that best answers the following questions.
words in a dictionary.
1. Is the woman married?
A: Can you help me, please? A. Yes, she is.
B: Of course, Ma’am. How can I help you?
B. No, she is not.
A: What is the meaning of “middle name”?
B: Oh. It’s easy. Middle name means your
second name. 2. What does “spouse” mean?
A: Thank you very much. And what does A. single or married
“spouse” mean?
B: That means husband or wife. In your case, it
B. husband or wife
means your husband.
A: I am sorry. I think you are wrong. 3. What is the meaning of middle name?
B: Pardon me. Let me see. No, I am right. Here it A. your first name
says spouse, your spouse’s name.
A: You’re completely wrong! B. your second name
B: Why?
A: Because I am not married.
B: Oh. My goodness!
Activity 15
Listen to and repeat the following questions. Then write
possible answers.
1. Can you help me, please?
2. Yes, how can I help you?
3. What does “spouse” mean?
4. What is the meaning of “date of birth”?
5. What is a “middle name”?
Lesson core
Conociste las diferentes formas para deletrear los nombres, apellidos y otras
palabras. Así como también conociste y practicaste el alfabeto del idioma inglés.
Utilizaste varias expresiones de cortesía o agradecimiento y como pedir algo a otras
personas en forma cortés y amable. Escribiste y utilizaste como se dicen el primer
nombre, segundo nombre y el apellido en Inglés. Pudiste escuchar y pronunciar
varias formas de dirigirse de forma respetuosa a las personas diciéndoles los títulos
correspondientes en Inglés. También, practicaste como escribir y utilizar diferentes
tipos de preguntas para pedir y brindar datos, plasmando tu información personal.

UNIT 1
Self evaluation

1 Which is an expression of courtesy?

a) Thank you so much. 3 Which one is a family name?
a) Karla
b) Don’t come in. b) Omar
c) It’s I-R-I-S. c) Martínez
d) Middle name. d) Enrique
2 Which is not an expression of courtesy?

a) You are welcome. 4 Which questions are used to give or ask
for help politely?
b) Your marital status. a) What is your marital status?
c) May I help you? b) Can you help me, please?
d) Enjoy your trip. c) May I help you?
d) How is your family?
4. b, c 3. c 2. b 1. a Answers:
TALKING TO FOREIGNERS
When you ask people about their names or
personal information in Spanish, you may not
have any problems. But when you ask foreigners
for their first names and last names, you need
to know how these are told, written and spelled.
To do so, you should be careful to ask for their
first names and last names politely by using
expressions of courtesy and gratitude. Also,
you need to know how different types of forms
are filled out, especially in the sections related
to names, last names and other personal
information. Besides that, you have to know how
to address people using English titles, depending
on their gender and marital status.
208 English - Seventh

Unit One Lesson 3
Can I have your telephone number?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son las diferentes formas de decir números
telefónicos en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen y se escriben los números naturales
del cero al noventa en Inglés?
¿Cuales son las palabras o expresiones que se utilizan
para decir que tu eres el propietario de diferentes
articulos en Inglés?
a números en Inglés?
I can express numbers when counting, giving addresses, and I can use possessive adjectives accurately to talk about personal
telephone numbers. belongings.
Which of the following are telephone numbers?
1. 2244-5555 2. 1989 3. 7141-8963 4. 2008 5. 1991
6. 2687-2387 Activity 1
What are the phone numbers in conversations 1 and 2?
Listen to and read the conversations carefully. Look up
any new words in a dictionary.
Conversation 1
A: Alex! Nice to see you.
B: Hey! Miguel. Good to see you again.
A: Where have you been?
B: In the Unites States with my family.
A: Good for you, Alex.
B: What is your telephone number?
A: It’s 7654-3210.
B: I’ll call you tonight.
Don’t forget!
Conversation 2
A: Roberto, do you have a new mobile phone number? There are different ways to make short and long
B: Do I have a ….what? distance calls. You have to dial the country code
A: A mobile phone, a cellular phone number! first to make an international call. For example, dial
B: Oh! Yes, of course. It’s 7865-8745. (506) + phone number to make a call to Costa Rica.
A: Wow! That’s a nice cell phone. Is it expensive? In El Salvador phone numbers have 8 digits, but
B: Not at all. It’s only ninety dollars. phone numbers in the USA only have 7 digits.
A: Ninety! Great.
Glossary:
Expensive: costs a lot of money.
Not at all: for nothing.

UNIT 1

Below is a list of cardinal numbers from 0 to 100. These numbers are used to express years, age, amounts of money, and
phone numbers among other things. Pay attention to their pronunciation and spelling. Listen to and repeat each number.
0 zero 8 eight 16 sixteen 24 twenty-four 50 fifty
1 one 9 nine 17 seventeen 25 twenty- five 60 sixty
2 two 10 ten 18 eighteen 26 twenty- six 70 seventy
3 three 11 eleven 19 nineteen 27 twenty-seven 80 eighty
4 four 12 twelve 20 twenty 28 twenty- eight 90 ninety
one hundred/
5 five 13 thirteen 21 twenty-one 29 twenty- nine 100 a hundred
6 six 14 fourteen 22 twenty-two 30 thirty
7 seven 15 fifteen 23 twenty-three 40 forty
Listen carefully to the spelling of the following cardinal Now listen carefully and choose the number you hear.
numbers and choose the correct figure.
1. 19 / 90
1. 10 / 12 2. 17 / 70
3. 13 / 30
2. 40 / 48
4. 15 / 50
3. 90 / 93 5. 18 / 80
4. 8 / 6 6. 14 / 40
5. 60 / 65 7. 16 / 60
What for?
3 Activity Cardinal numbers are used to express telephone
numbers, age, dates, ID numbers, driver’s license
numbers, etc. To identify numbers, you must
Listen carefully to and repeat the following pairs know how they are written and pronounced.
of numbers.
1 thirteen thirty
2 fourteen forty
3 fifteen fifty
4 sixteen sixty
5 seventeen seventy
6 eighteen eighty
7 nineteen ninety

UNIT 1

Interesting numbers: ~ 0 ~ What could possibly be interesting about nothing?
Look at the number of ways “0” can be said in English.
Read the following table taken from Learn English Basics. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
When we use it Examples
after a decimal point 9.02 = "Nine point oh two."
0 = oh
Room 101 = "Room one oh one."
in bus or room numbers
Bus 602 = “Bus six oh two.”
in phone numbers 9130472 = "Nine one three oh four seven two."
in years 1906 = "Nineteen oh six."
0 = nought before a decimal point 0.06 = "Nought point oh six."
in temperature -10°C = "10 degrees below zero."
0 = zero
U.S. English for the number 0 = "Zero"
Chelsea 2 Manchester United 0 = "Chelsea two Manchester
0 = nil in football United nil."
0 = love in tennis 40 - 0 = "Forty - love."
Decide whether the following statements are true or false Read the following conversations and identify which way the
according to the table. figure “0” is used.
1. “Zero” is used after decimal point. Conversation 1
A: Can you repeat your account number again, please?
2. “Oh” is used in tennis scores.
B: It’s 50469.
3. “Love” is used to express temperatures.
4. “Oh” is used in phone numbers.

Listen to and read the following conversation between
two friends.
A: Peter! Come on in.
B: Hey, Carlos. What are you watching?
A: A soccer game. El Salvador versus Costa Rica. Conversation 2
B: On which TV channel? A: Let me see the score, please.
A: On fifty-five.
B: Okay. It is 15-0.
B: What’s the score?
A: El Salvador one, Costa Rica nil.
6 Activity
Now answer the following questions.

1. Is the soccer game on channel fifty-five?
2. Is El Salvador winning the game?
Glossary:
Come on in: please, come inside.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following conversations. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
Conversation 2
A: Excuse me, sir. Can you help me, please?
B: Yes, ma’am. How can I help you?
A: I don’t know how to use this new cell phone. I need
to call my husband.
B: Let me call him with my cell phone. What is the
phone number you want to call?
A: It’s 2223-4455.
C: Hello, Who is this?
Conversation 1 B: What is your husband’s name?
A: Do you have the phone number of the American A: It’s Bobby.
Embassy? B: Is this Bobby? Your wife wants to talk to you.
B: Yes, it’s 2663-9587. Why? C: Yes, thank you.
A: Well, I want to know what date of birth means. I
have to fill out this form.
B: Let me take a look at it. Maybe I can help you.
A: Yes, please!
Activity 8
B: Birth date. Okay, you have to write the month, day
and year you were born. Answer the following questions about conversation 1.
A: I see now. Well, it is October 15, 1990.
B: Then write ten - fifteen - nineteen ninety. 1. What does date of birth mean?
2. What is the American Embassy’s phone number?
Don’t forget!
When saying phone numbers, each figure is said

separately; 24 is two- four. The figure “0” is called “oh”;
Activity 9
105 is one- oh- five. Pause after groups of 3 or 4 figures;
376 4705 is three- seven-six, four- seven- oh- five. If two Answer the following questions about conversation 2.
successive figures are the same, repeat the figure twice; 1. What’s the phone number that the woman needs
77 is seven- seven. For example, 376- 4775 is three- to call?
seven- six, four- seven- seven - five.
2. What is the name of the woman’s husband?
Glossary: I don’t know how: don’t understand.

Take a look at: to analyze.
Date of birth: the year you were born.

UNIT 1

These are some of the most common telephone phrases used when answering a personal or business call. You should
become comfortable using them.
Telephone calls - Common English phrases
Answering the phone: Offering to take a message:
Good morning/afternoon/evening. Can I take a message?
Say the name of the business. Would you like to leave a message?
How can I help you?
Explaining there’s a problem: Asking for the name and number:
Hold on for a second/minute. Could you give me your name and number, please?
I'm sorry, but he/she's out of the office at
the moment.
Offering help: Checking the information:
Is there anyone else who could help you? Could you spell that, please?
Maybe I can help you? Could you repeat that, please?
Offering a return call:
Perhaps he/she can call you back?
Could he/she call you back?

Listen to and read the following conversation carefully.
Activity 10
Pay attention to the common telephone phrases.
A: Hello? Choose the letter that best answers each question.
B: Hi, is this María?
A: No. Who are you? 1. Is María at home?
B: It’s Roland here. Is María at home? A. Yes, she is.
A: No, she is not. Can I take a message? B. No, she is not.
B: Yes, thanks. Could you ask her to meet me at
Metrocentro at 2 p.m.?
A: Sure, Roland. Could you hold on for a second? 2. Where are Roland and María meeting this afternoon?
B: No problem.
A: Hi. Now could you repeat that, please? I didn’t A. at Metrocentro
have a pen at hand. B. at Metrosur
B: Sure. Tell her to meet me at Metrocentro at 2
o’clock.
A: Okay, is that all? 3. What time will they meet?
B: Yes, thanks a lot. A. at 2 o’clock
B. at 3 o’clock
Activity 11
Write a short conversation using some common
telephone phrases.
Glossary:
Hold on for a second: wait.
At hand: nearby or in your hand.

UNIT 1
Language in use
Possessive adjectives are used with a noun to show
possession or relationship of an object. Possessive adjectives
Activity 12
are the same whether the noun is singular or plural.
Replace the highlighted noun with the correct possessive adjective.
Examples: Example: Mary’s mother is helping her in
1. your book-your books the kitchen.
2. her friend-her friends Answer: Her mother…
Study the following table and compare subject pronouns
with possessive adjectives. 1. Rosa’s brother lives in California.
2. Gabby’s cousin is coming to visit her next month.
Subject pronouns Possessive adjectives 3. This is Mr. Vega’s house.
I my car 4. Carla’s sister is married.
you your name 5. Eddy and Paula’s children are in middle school.
he his cell phone 6. The restaurant’s food is famous all over
she her last name El Salvador.
it its name 7. Do you know what Elizabeth’s telephone number is?
we our numbers 8. What is Arturo’s address?
they their friends 9. Not all of Mr. and Mrs. Rosales’s children are married.
Listen to and repeat the following sentences:
I have a car.
You have a car.
My car is new.
Your car is fast.
Activity 13
Carlos has a car. His car is red.
Write 4 original sentences using possessive adjectives.
Abby has new shoes. Her shoes are nice.
The cat has a sore leg. Its leg is injured.
We have a big TV. Our TV has big screen.
Rick and Lola want to Their car is old.
buy a new car.
Read and study the following table:

Henry's car his car
Janet's shoes her shoes
Joe and Linda's car their car
the car’s wheels its wheels
mother’s and my cake our cake
Hands on! 1C
The personal information section of an application form may also include ways in which
to contact you: your home address, phone numbers, and email address. Be sure to include
your home and cell phone numbers so that you can be reached at any time of the day.

UNIT 1
Write an original conversation using any of the phone numbers
given in activity 14..
Listen to the telephone numbers and choose the
correct answer.
1. A. 852-4014
What for?
B. 825-4107
C. 285-1417 To make telephone calls properly, you should
know how to take and leave messages. To answer
2. A. 942-6330 personal or business calls you should keep the
above phrases in mind.
B. 924-3616
C. 944-3163
3. A. 7251-9802
B. 7529-0183 Activity 16
C. 7279-8804
4. A. 281-0523 Listen to and repeat each sentence carefully. Then write

B. 218-5032
possible questions or answers that correspond.
C. 288-5303 1. What’s your telephone number?
2. I am 25 years old.
5. A. 2654-40134 3. Can I take a message?
B. 2645-41315 4. Can you repeat that?
C. 2655-40136 5. I have fifteen cousins.
Lesson core
Conociste las diferentes formas de preguntar y expresar los números

telefónicos en Inglés. Supiste que dependiendo del país o región, el número
o código de área y el número de dígitos son diferentes. Además, practicaste
la pronunciación y escritura de los números cardinales del cero al cien que
se utilizan tanto para expresar fechas como números telefónicos, cuentas
de ahorro, licencias y otros números de identidad personal. Asimismo,
aprendiste a tomar y dejar mensajes telefónicos en Inglés utilizando algunas
frases comunes para contestar llamadas personales y de negocios. Finalmente,
practicaste como utilizar los pronombres posesivos en Inglés con tu propia
información y de las personas que te rodean.

UNIT 1
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following is a common

phone phrase? 3 Which of the following is a date?
a) 999897
a) Don’t mention it.
b) 15/19/1998
b) Zero.
c) 10/15/1991
c) Could I have your cell phone number?
d) 2234-1408
d) Thank you.
2 Which of the following is the written

form for 2512-3098? 4 Which of the following have possessive
adjectives?
a) two five two two three oh nine eight a) What is your birth date?
b) two five one three two oh nine eight b) That is Mario’s car.
c) two five one two three oh nine eight c) May I help you?
d) two five one two three oh eight nine d) How is her family?
4. a, d 3.c 2. c 1. c Answers:
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
It is really important to know how telephone

numbers are spoken and written in the English
language, especially when you ask foreigners
or when they ask you for phone numbers. You
have to keep in mind that when making long
distance phone calls, you should know the
country code and the city that you are going to
call. Also, if people are asking for your personal
information, like your phone number, you should
know how these are said and read in English.
Finally, you should be ready and able to provide
your birth date and the expiration of your personal
identification cards both in numbers and words on
your documents.

Unit One Lesson 4
Is that your new laptop?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son los diferentes equipos que utilizas en
tu trabajo?
¿Cómo se dicen y se escriben los colores más
comunes en Inglés?
¿Cuáles son las pronombres o palabras se utilizan
para señalar la cercanía o distancia de los objetos o
personas en Inglés?
a experiencia laboral en Inglés?
I can locate office objects using the prepositions in/on/at. I can write descriptions of color and location of objects.
I can use possessive adjectives accurately to talk about office and
personal belongings.
Which of the following are colors in English?
1. red 2. laptop 3. blue 4. pc 5. white 6. CD player 7. yellow

Listen to and read the following conversation carefully
and identify the colors. Look up any new words in
a dictionary.
A: Good morning, Maura.
B: Good morning, Paul.
A: Is that your laptop?
B: Yes, it’s my new laptop.
A: Wow! It looks great. I like the red color.
B: Do you have a laptop, Paul?
A: Yes, I do. It’s white and blue.
B: Hey! That’s a nice color.
Activity 2
Put the following statements in the correct order to make a
complete and logical conversation.
1 Activity
__ Hello, Vicky. I am moving to a new office.
Answer the following questions. __ Really? Why?

__ That’s a nice color.
1. What color is Maura’s laptop? __ Hi, Miguel. What’s going on?
2. What color is Paul’s laptop? __ Because they are painting my office light blue.
Glossary:
Laptop: a portable computer.

UNIT 1

1. Listen to and repeat each color several times. What
are your favorite colors?
white black yellow gray green blue orange purple pink red brown beige
2. Listen to and repeat each piece office equipment

carefully.
chair in-tray printer photocopier
desk desktop computer telephone trash can
What color is it? Look around your home or office and name
Listen to each color and choose the color you hear. the color of each piece of office equipment that you see.
1. red / blue 4. purple / pink Example: intray - black

2. yellow / orange 5. khaki / beige
3. white / black 6. green / brown Equipment
1. desk
2. desktop computer
What for? 3. telephone
4. trash can
You should be able to name and describe objects found
at your office or job in order to have a conversation 5. chair
about your place of work. To describe pieces of office 6. printer
equipment, you should know how to write and 7. photocopier
pronounce them correctly.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following email carefully. Look up any Listen to and read the following conversation carefully. Look
new words in a dictionary. up any new words in a dictionary.
A: May I come in?

B: Sure. Come on in.
A: Boss, I have a problem with my portable computer.
B: What’s wrong?
A: I really don’t know. There is a big, blue message on
the screen.
B: Well, you could call the computer technician.
A: Okay, boss.
B: Can you do me a favor, Carlos?
A: Of course. What is it?
B: Take my laptop to the technician, and tell him it does
not turn on.
From: mrosemary@gmail.com A: Excuse me, boss. Where is your laptop?
To: amary@gmail.com B: Oh! Sorry. It’s on my desk.
Hi, Mary.
I have the ideal office at my new job. I have a big, brown

desk with four drawers. On my desk, I have a black desktop
computer with four gray speakers to listen to music in my free
time or during my lunch break. Next to my monitor, which is
green, there is a white multifunctional printer with a scanner,
photocopier and fax machine all in one! To my right is a red,
electric pencil sharpener. Next to it is a beige in-tray where I
put all of the paperwork. The only thing that I am not happy
with is that all of the colors do not match.
Say hi to your family.
Bye,
Rosemary
Activity 6
5 Activity Read the conversation again and answer the
following questions.
Decide whether the following statements are true or false 1. What’s wrong with Carlos’s portable computer?
according to the above email. 2. Where is the boss’s laptop?
1. Rosemary’s desk is brown.
2. Her multifunctional printer is white.
3. Her in-tray is blue.
Don’t forget!
4. Her speakers are purple.
To describe or tell where your belongings or office
5. Her monitor is green. equipment are located, you need to know how to
6. All of her office equipment has matching colors. use propositions of place.
Glossary: Screen: monitor.

Ideal: perfect. Technician: repairman.
Drawers: small compartments inside a desk. Turn on: to start or switch on.
Message: a text or note.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following conversations and repeat them out loud. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
A: Hi, Mike. A: Mike!
B: Hey, Rose. What’s up? B: Hey, Rose. What’s new?
A: Can I ask you something? A: I have other questions about the job application form.
B: Sure. What is it? Can you help me?
A: Do you know what “present employer” and B: No problem!
“employment history” are about? A: What does “skills and qualifications” mean?
B: Yes, I know. Why? B: Okay, Rose, “skills” are all of your abilities, training
A: I am filling out this job application. And I don’t know workshops, and experiences, and “qualifications” are
what to write. your diplomas and education that make you a good
B: Okay. It’s very easy. Look, “present employment” is the job candidate for the job.
that you are working at now and “employment history” are A: Wow! Thanks a lot, Mike.
previous positions or jobs in other companies. B: You’re welcome.
A: Now I understand! Thank you so much. A: One more thing!
B: You’re welcome. B: Yes?
A: Should I use a black or red pen?
B: Well, it’s better to use black. And you should print the letters.
7 Activity
Activity 8
Choose the letter that best answers the following questions Choose the letter that best answers the following questions
about conversation 1. about the conversation 2.
1. What does “present employer” mean? 1. What does “skills and qualifications” mean?
A. your present job
A. abilities and experiences
B. your present boss
B. previous salaries
2. What color of pen is better to use to fill out a job
2. What does “employment history” mean? application form?
A. your previous jobs A. red ink
B. your present positions B. black ink
Glossary:
Training workshops: preparation or instruction courses.
Print: to write clearly without joining the letters.

UNIT 1

When we refer to prepositions of place, we usually refer to “in”, “at” and “on” among others.
Study the following table of prepositions:
At On In Under Next to
An object or
An object or An object or person
An object or person person that is
person that is that is below
A specific place. that is physically on near or at the side
enclosed or someone
top of a something. of something or
within boundaries. or something. someone.
at the mall on the table in the city under the book next to the pen
at the table on the floor in the box under the desk next to the book
at work on the wall in the office under the chair next to Miguel
Now take a look at the following pictures: 1. 2.

1. The book is on the desk.
2. The book is under the chair.
3. The book is in the drawer.
4. The book is next to the laptop.
5. The secretary is at the desk in her chair.
3. 4. 5.

Activity 9
identify the prepositions of place. Fill in the blanks with the correct preposition of place.
A: Elizabeth, where is the report? I have a meeting 1. The report is __ the pencil sharpener.
with the financial manager. 2. The keys are __ the desk.
B: Mr. Galvez, it’s next to the pencil sharpener. 3. The glasses are __ your shirt pocket.
A: And where are the keys to the meeting room? 4. We live __ a supermarket.
B: They are on the desk.
5. The refrigerator is __ the kitchen.
A: Oh, no! I can’t find my glasses. Where are they?
6. My mom is __ the store buying a birthday
B: They are in your shirt pocket.
present for my nephew.

UNIT 1
Language in use
Demonstrative pronouns are used to show the closeness
or proximity of nouns (e.g. people, animals, objects,
things, etc.) in relation to the speaker’s location. There
are singular and plural forms of demonstrative pronouns.
“This” and “these” are used for nouns which are near the
speaker, but “that” and “those” are used for nouns which
are far from the speaker.

Singular form Examples
this This is a printer. (here)
that That is a laptop. (over there)
Plural form Examples
these These are books. (here)
those Those are laptops. (over there)
“This” and “these” have similar pronunciation but not the

same. Listen to and repeat each word several times. Conversation and more
this that these those Listen to and read the following conversation carefully
and identify the demonstrative pronouns.
Now take a look at the following pictures: A: Hi, Manuel. Is that your new printer?
B: Yes, it is. And this is the instruction manual.
A: How about those printer cartridges next to the
monitor? Are they new?
B: No, Alex. These are old.
This is a printer That is a laptop

Activity 10
based on the conversation.
1. Whose printer is new?
A. Manuel’s
B. Alex’s
2. Are the printer cartridges next to the monitor new?

A. Yes, they are.
Those are laptops
B. No, they are not.
These are printers
Glosssary:
Printer cartridges: ink boxes for printing.

UNIT 1
11 Activity What for?
Complete each sentence by choosing the correct preposition. To show the proximity of objects in relation to your
location, you need to know how to use demonstrative
1. Look in the appendix (at/on) the end of adjectives correctly.
the report.
2. Peter is waiting for you (at/on) the bus stop.
3. The bank is (at/next to) the end of the street.
4. When will you arrive (at/under) the office?
5. Do you work (in/under) an office?
Activity 12
6. I have a meeting (in/on) San Salvador.
Unscramble the following statements to form sentences
7. Do you live (in/at) Panama? or questions.
8. The author’s name is (on/in) the cover of the book.
1. these/ what/ are/?
9. There are no prices (on/under) this menu.
2. that/ is/ telephone/ your/ new/?
10. You are standing (on/at) my foot. 3. report/ on/ is/ the/ desk/ the
11. There was a “no smoking” sign (on/in) the wall. 4. have/ blue/ I/ pen/ a
5. are/ the/ where/ files?
6. portable/ the/ is/ computer/ next to/ in –tray/ the
Don’t forget!
Activity 13
Prepositions of place are used to describe the
place or position of all types of nouns. It is Write 10 sentences describing where objects in your office
common for the preposition to be placed before are located.
the noun.
Examples: My computer is on the desk.
My computer is next to the printer.
Lesson core
Conociste los colores más básicos y comunes en Inglés los cuales utilizaste para describir
los colores de algunos objetos. También conociste como decir en Inglés los equipos
y objetos más comunes que se usan en tu oficina o lugar de trabajo. Para describir la
ubicación de los objetos, utilizaste algunas preposiciones de lugar. Para señalar o expresar
la proximidad de las cosas, utilizaste los pronombres demostrativos. Finalmente, tuviste la
oportunidad de conocer algunos términos que se encuentran en algunos formularios y
solicitudes de empleos.

UNIT 1
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following are prepositions

of place? 3 What does “qualifications” mean on a
job application?
a) your present position
a) file
b) on b) your previous jobs
c) desk c) your abilities, education, trainings
d) in and experience
d) your employment history
2 Which of the following are colors?

a) print 4 Which of the following include
demonstrative pronouns?
b) pink a) What is that?
c) back b) May I ask you a question?
d) black c) This is Mario’s car.

d) Where is the application form?
4. a, c 3. c 2. b, d 1. b, d Answers:
IN AN OFFICE
Knowing how to say the names of commonly used

office equipment and tools is very important
for any person who wants to work in an English
speaking company either inside or outside of El
Salvador. It is necessary to know how to describe
the supplies, tools, and office equipment in
English with their respective colors and names. It
is also necessary to locate their position inside a
physical space.

Unit One Lesson 5
Can you turn on the printer, please?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son las formas más comunes en las cuales los
jefes se dirigen a sus subordinados o trabajadores?
¿Cómo se dan órdenes en Inglés?
¿Cómo se forman el plural de los sustantivos en Inglés?
¿Cómo se siguen indicaciones para realizar algunas
actividades o procesos en Inglés?
¿Cómo se expresan oraciones negativas utilizando el
verbo ser o estar en Inglés?
I can understand and respond to commands.
I can write the correct form of plural nouns.
I can read, identify, and use expressions of courtesy and thanks.
Which of the following are commands in English?

1. come in 2. black 3. read the book 4. three books
5. turn on the TV 6. a red file

and identify the commands. Look up any new words in
Activity 1
a dictionary.
based on the conversation.
A: Hey, Ricardo. Can you give me a hand, please?
B: Sure. How can I help you, Rudy? 1. Whose printer is not working?
A: This old printer isn’t working properly. I want to A. Rudy’s printer
print these reports. B. Ricardo’s printer
B: Let me see. First, turn the printer off. Then, turn
it on.
2. Which are Ricardo’s commands?
A: Okay. First I turn it off, and then I turn it on.
B: Now let’s print. Which is the file, Rudy? A. turn it on then turn it off
A: That one. It says “my reports”. B. turn it off then turn it on
B: Okay. Now I click “print”.
A: It’s printing now! Thanks a lot, Ricardo. 3. What is the name of the Rudy’s file?
B: You’re welcome. A. my files
B. my reports
Glossary: Turn off: to interrupt the flow of power to an electrical device.

Give me a hand: help me.
Properly: correctly.

UNIT 1
Enrich your vocabulary If there are a number of steps in your instructions you
can use the following sequence markers:
In English, the imperative directs someone to do
something. When you want to give a command or First Then Next After that Finally
an instruction, just say the verb in the base form. For
example: sit down, come in, don’t smoke, listen to me, be
quiet, don’t speak to me like that, etc.
When you buy something new, it comes with an
instruction booklet that explains how to use it. This
instruction booklet uses imperatives. These instruction
booklets direct you to follow clear and logical steps in
order to complete a task.
The negative form is expressed with do + not + the
verb in base form. For example, “Do not smoke in your
room.” or “Don’t touch me!”
2 Activity
Activity 3
Put the following statements in the correct order to give
instructions on how to make a cup of coffee. Put the following statements in the correct order to show
someone how to make a phone call on a fax machine.
__ Finally, stir the coffee.
__ Then, measure some coffee into a spoon and put it __ Finally, wait for an answer from the person you
in the cup. are calling.
__ After that, add a little milk. __ Then, pick up the telephone receiver.
__ Next, pour the hot water into the cup. __ First, locate telephone.
__ First, boil some water. __ Next, dial the number.
1. 2.
Activity 4
Write an easy instruction sequence to show someone how to
make something. Use the previous activities as examples.
3. 4. What for?
Instruction manuals are written for people to follow

directions to complete a task. These instructions are
written using imperatives in affirmative and negative
forms. Instruction manuals are mostly used for setting
up or installing items such as household appliances,
5. computer hardware or software, electrical devices,
and many other items. It is important to follow these
instructions carefully since omitting any step or
misunderstanding any step could result in failure to set
up or install the item successfully.

UNIT 1

Listen to and read the following passage from “How to Give Listen to and read the following conversations carefully. Look
Orders” by F. John Reh carefully. Look up any new words in up any new words in a dictionary.
a dictionary.
Conversation 1
A: Gloria! Gloria! Bring two cups of coffee.
B: Yes, Mr. Calvo. Right away!
A: Gloria. Don’t forget the sugar.
Conversation 2
A: Betty. Please, bring a cup of coffee to my office.
B: Yes, Mr. Duran… Here it is.
A: Thank you, Betty. And bring me more sugar, please.
B: Here you are, sir.
Activity 6
Read the previous conversations again and answer the
following question.
1. Which conversation sounds more polite? Why?
Don’t give orders Conversation 3
Many people believe that to be a good manager you have to
give orders to the people below you. They are wrong. You do A: Roxy! Please, come to my office immediately.
not have to give orders. In fact, you should not give orders. B: I am coming, Mr. Hard.
When you give orders, you tell someone to do something. “Put A: Where are the financial reports? I need them urgently
that file on my desk” is an example of an order. So is “put Roger because I have a meeting with the general manager.
on the late shift”. When you give an order, you do not allow the B: I put them on your desk next to the in-tray.
other person any freedom to think about what to do or how to A: But they are not there. Please, look for them in your
do it. All they can do is try to satisfy your order exactly the way desk drawers.
you said to. There are two reasons why giving orders is bad. B: Okay. I’ll go right away!
First, you do not allow the person the opportunity to figure out A: Roxy! Roxy! Here they are …under my chair.
the best way to do the task. Second, you do not allow them B: Here you are, sir.
to learn.
Answer the following questions according to the passage above. Read the previous conversation again and answer the
following questions.
1. Do good managers have to give orders to people
below them? 1. Where are the financial reports?
2. How many reasons are stated as to why giving 2. Who is looking for the financial reports?
orders is bad?
Glossary:
Shift: schedule at work.
Figure out: to think and understand.

UNIT 1
Language in use
There are two basic types of questions in English: Yes / No questions and Wh- questions (information questions).
Also, there are two basic intonation patterns when asking a question: Falling intonation (the voice goes down and gets
weaker) and rising intonation (the voice rises and gets louder).
1. Yes / No questions have a rising intonation at the end of the statement. Listen to the following questions and
answers and study the following table:
Questions Answers
Am I an employee? Yes, you are. No, you aren’t.
Is he here? Yes, he is. No, he isn’t.
Is she a secretary? Yes, she is. No, she isn’t.
Is it a printer? Yes, it is. No, it isn’t.
Are we wrong? Yes, we are. No, we aren’t.
Are you Mr. Rosales? Yes, I am. No, I’m not.
Are they Salvadorans? Yes, they are. No, they aren’t.
2. Wh- questions (information questions) have a falling intonation at the end of the statement. Listen to the
questions and study the following table:
Questions Answers
Where is the USB? It’s on the monitor.
Don’t forget!
What is your name? It’s Rolando.
Yes/No questions are used to ask people to respond
Who is Mr. Gomez? He is my boss. affirmatively or negatively. On the other hand,
When is the meeting? It’s this afternoon. Wh- questions (information questions) ask for a
Which are your CDs? The black ones. response that is more specific and requires more
detailed information than Yes/No questions.
Listen to and repeat the following questions carefully. Listen to and repeat the following questions. Then write
Then write possible answers. possible answers.
1. Are you Mr. Chavez? 1. How can I help you?

2. Is that your chair? 2. Where is Mr. Alas?
3. Are these your documents? 3. When is the interview?
4. Is she the new boss? 4. How are you?
5. Are they the managers? 5. Who is that woman?
6. Is he your coworker? 6. Which is the new laptop?
7. Are we on the same team? 7. Why are you so happy today?

UNIT 1
Language in use
There are singular and plural forms of nouns in the
English language. There are spelling rules to form
Activity 12
plural nouns.
The following table focuses on the regular plural noun Listen to the following words and choose the word that
forms. Study the table: is spelled.
Forming Examples 1. flowers / flower
Noun ending the plural Singular - Plural 2. laptop / laptops
boss - bosses 3. file / files
-s, -x, -ch or Add –es tax - taxes
-sh 4. faxes / fax
bush - bushes
5. application / applications
Change -y to fly - flies
consonant 6. forms / form
-i then add try - tries
+ -y –es curry - curries
cat - cats
most others Add –s dog - dogs What for?
day – days
Most nouns in English have both singular and plural
forms, and the plural is usually formed by adding “-s”,
10 Activity “-es” or “-ies” to the singular. However, there are some
irregular plural spellings. For example: sheep-sheep,
foot-feet, man-men, woman-women.
Change the following lists of words into their plural forms.
1. pencil, girl, city, ax
2. coat, bench, sketch, owner
3. file, mug, bell, church
4. chair, picture, cookie, box
5. day, house, candy, tree
6. bush, touch, wagon, basin
11 Activity
Draw a similar table in your notebook and then classify the

nouns in activity 10 according to their plural endings.
Plurals /s/ /es/ /ies/

1 pencil pencils
2 girl girls
3 city cities
4 ax axes

UNIT 1
Language in use
Imperatives
To make an imperative statement, use the base form
Activity 14
of the verb. The imperative form does not begin with a
subject, instead the subject “you” is implied. Make negative statements using imperatives from the
Study the following table: following sentences.
Subject “you” implied Imperative form 1. Tell your employees not to listen to music in
your office.
(you) go home Go home.
2. Tell your secretary not to make personal telephone calls.
(you) send the document Send the document.
3. Tell your friends not to fill out the application form
(you) bring the report Bring the report. for that company.
The imperative can be used to give commands to an 4. Tell your clients not to wait for the general manager.
individual or to a group of individuals, but the subject
“you” is always omitted. Study the table below:
Sentence Imperative
(you) bring the coffee Bring the coffee.
Activity 15
(you) (plural) turn on the PC Turn on the PC.
Write five affirmative and five negative statements
(you) bring the report Bring the report. using imperatives.
To make negative imperatives, use “do not” or “don’t”
before the verb. Study the table below: Hands on! 1E
Imperative Negative Imperative
Turn on the computer Don’t turn on the When filling out a job application form, you should
now. computer now. ask yourself: Do I have the experience needed
to apply for this job? Do I know vocabulary and
Send the email now. Don’t send the email now. expressions related to this job? If I am under the
Fill out this form. Don’t fill out this form. legal age, do I have a work permit?
13 Activity
Make affirmative statements by using imperatives from the

following sentences.
1. You go to the bank.
2. You describe the computer problem.
3. They send the financial reports.
4. You turn off the fax.
5. We drink coffee in the meeting room.
6. We make a telephone call.
7. You use a telephone headset to answer the phone calls.

UNIT 1
Write the plural forms of the following lists of words. Write two original conversations using:
1. cat, slipper, fork, book 1. courtesy expressions
2. chair, desk, house, paper 2. imperatives
3. shoe, garden, horse, dress 3. greetings
4. cart, kitchen, pony, glass 4. numbers
5. day, lamp, dog, star
17 Activity
Answer the following questions with your own information.

1. What is your name? 10. How do you spell your middle name?
2. What is your mother’s name? 11. Is your cell phone expensive?
3. What is your last name? 12. What is your favorite color?
4. Where are you from? 13. What color is your house?
5. What is your phone number? 14. What does “fill out” mean?
6. Where do you live? 15. What is the meaning of “employment history”?
7. Where do you work? 16. What are “skills and qualifications” about?
8. How are you? 17. What is your date of birth?
9. Are you an employer or on employee?
Lesson core
Conociste las formas más comunes de dar órdenes o indicaciones en Inglés,

los cuales utilizaste para hacer que las personas hicieran algo para ti. También
estudiaste como se forma el plural de los sustantivos así como la pronunciación
de los mismos. Además, conociste como se dice y usa la forma negativa del
verbo ser o estar en presente simple en Inglés. Asimismo, practicaste como
utilizar algunas palabras para expresar secuencia de procesos en contexto y
de forma sencilla. Finalmente, tuviste la oportunidad de conocer la diferencia
entre dar órdenes y la de dar indicaciones a las demás personas, utilizando la
forma imperativa de los verbos en Inglés ya sea de forma negativa o afirmativa.

UNIT 1
Self evaluation
Choose the letter that best answers each question.
1 Which is a polite instruction?

a) Don’t mention it. 3 Which is a Wh- question?
a) Is your phone number 7899-9897?
b) Please, send this email. b) Can you print these documents
c) Could I use your cell phone? for me?
d) You can turn off the computer now. c) Where are the financial reports?
d) May I see the application job?
2 Which is a negative imperative?

a) Can you give me a hand? 4 Which is a Yes/No question?
a) What is your birth date?
b) I don’t know how to use this printer. b) Where is Mario’s car?
c) Don‘t turn on the computer yet, c) Are you the new secretary?
please. d) How is her family?
d) My boss does not know the word
“please” at work.
4. c 3.c 2. c 1. b Answers:
FOLLOWING ORDERS
You should keep in mind that when working for a

company or enterprise, you will need to receive
and follow orders and instructions in order to
carry out dialy task or procedures. Also, you
should know how to ask questions in English to
confirm or clarify the information by means of
Yes/ No questions. In addition, if you need to
know more details about what you have been
asked to do, you can use the information or Wh-
questions. It is of vital importance to know how
to give and recieve instructions in the office or
any workplace in order to keep an environment of
harmony, efficiency and mutul respect.

Answer Key
Lesson 1 Activity 4: 1. True 2. True 3. True 4. True

Activity 5: Answers may vary.
Activity 1: 1. She is fine. 2. He is okay. 3. She is
not bad. Activity 6: 1. B 2. A 3. B
Activity 2: Conversation 1: Hi, Good morning., Activity 7: 1. B 2. A
How are you., It’s nice to meet you. Activity 8: 1. B 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. B
Conversation 2: Good afternoon., Activity 9: 1. Enjoy your stay. 2. Please come in.
Hello., It’s nice to meet you., I am glad 3. Would you like a drink? 4. Could you
to meet you. spell your name please?
Activity 3: 1. A 2. A May I help you?
Activity 4: 1. B 2. A 3. A Activity 10: Answers may vary.
Activity 5: 1. False 2. True 3. False Activity 11: 1. is 2. are 3. am 4. are 5. is
Activity 6: 1. B 2. B 3. B Activity 12: 1. False 2. False 3. False 4. True
Activity 7: 2, 1, 4, 3 Activity 13: 1. Mr. 2. Miss 3. Mrs.
Activity 8: Formal conversations: 1 and 3. Activity 14: 1. B 2. B 3. B
Informal conversations: 2 and 4. Activity 15: Answers may vary.
Activity 10: 1. is 2. are 3. am 4. are 5. is
Activity 11: 1. What 2. Where 3. Who 4. Where Lesson 3
5. How
Activity 12: 1. are 2. is 3. Are Activity 1: Conversation 1: 7654-3210
Conversation 2: 7865- 8745
Activity 13: Conversation 1: you, right, introduce,
Nice to meet you. Activity 2: 1. ten 2. forty 3. ninety 4. eight
Conversation 2: How, Please, can. 5. sixty
Activity 14: Conversation 1: Fausto, Karla Activity 3: Listening activity.
Conversation 2: Alas, Salas Activity 4: 1. 19 2. 70 3. 13 4. 15 5. 80 6. 14 7. 60
Activity 15: Answers may vary. Activity 5: 1. False 2. False 3. False 4. True
Activity 6: 1. yes 2. yes
Activity 7: Conversation 1: oh.
Conversation 2: love.
Lesson 2
Activity 8: 1. when you were born 2. 2663- 9587
Activity 1: 1. B 2. Z 3. H 4. N 5. W Activity 9: 1. 2223-4455 2. Bobby
Activity 2: 1. Kris 2. Karla 3. Rolando 4. Sarai Activity 10: 1. B 2. A 3. A
5. Jessica Activity 11: Answers may vary.
Activity 3: 1. Aguilera 2. Potter 3. Enrique
4. Payes 5. Ruis

Answer Key
Activity 12: 1. her 2. her 3. his 4. her 5. their 6. its Lesson 5
7. her 8. his 9. their
Activity 1: 1. A 2. B 3.B
Activity 14: 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. A
Activity 2: 5, 4, 2, 3, 1

Activity 3: 3, 2, 4, 1

Activity 5: 1.no 2. two
Activity 6: Conversation 2 because it uses more
Lesson 4 courtesy expressions
Activity 1: 1. red 2. white and blue Activity 7: 1. next to the in-tray 2. Mr. Hard
Activity 2: 4, 1, 2, 5, 3 Activity 8: Answers may vary.
Activity 3: 1. red 2. yellow 3. black 4. pink 5. beige Activity 9: Answers may vary.
6. green Activity 10: 1. pencils, girls, cities, axes 2. coats,
Activity 4: Answers may vary. benches, sketches, owners 3. files, mugs,
bells, churches 4. chairs, pictures, cookies,
Activity 5: 1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. True boxes 5. days, houses, candies, trees
6. False 6. bushes, touches, wagons, basins
Activity 6: 1. It has a big, blue message on the Activity 11: 1. pencil(s), girl(s), cit(ies), ax(es)
screen. 2. It’s on his desk. 2. coat(s), bench(es), sketch(es),
Activity 7: 1. A 2. A owner(s) 3. file(s), mug(s), bell(s),
Activity 8: 1. A 2. B church(es) 4. chair(s), picture(s),
cookie(s), box(es) 5. day(s), house(s),
Activity 9: 1. next to 2. on 3. in 4. next to 5. in 6. at cand(ies), tree(s) 6. bush(es), touch(es),
Activity 10: 1. A 2. B wagon(s), basin(s)
Activity 11: 1. at 2. at 3. at 4. at 5. in 6. in 7. in 8. on Activity 12: 1. flowers 2. laptop 3. files 4. faxes
9. on 10. on 11. on 5. applications 6. form
Activity 12: 1. What are these? 2. Is that your new Activity 13: 1. Go to… 2. Describe the…3. Send
telephone? 3. The report is on the desk. the… 4. Turn off… 5. Drink coffee…
4. I have a blue pen. 5. Where are the 6. Make a… 7. Use a….
files? 6. The portable computer is next Activity 14: 1. Don’t listen… 2. Don’t make…
to the in-tray. 3. Don’t fill out… 4. Don’t wait…
Activity 13: Answers may vary. Activity 15: Answers may vary.
Activity 16: 1. cats, slippers, forks, books 2. chairs,
desks, houses, papers 3. shoes, gardens,
horses, dresses 4. carts, kitchens, ponies,
glasses 5. days, lamps, dogs, stars

Hands on!
“Filling out a job application form” Part 1
Purpose
This project will help you to improve your English skills. The first part of this project will teach you how to fill out
specific sections of a common job application form, such as personal information. It is one of the first steps to
applying for a job in English.
Theory and practice

The different phases of the unit 1 project (from Hands on!1A to Hands on! 1E) gave you ideas on how to
understand technical concepts which are included in any application form.
With these different project phases, you should have kept track of key elements or concepts to give you a mental
picture of what an application’s sections could include.
Development
You should have noticed that when answering the different activities, you were gaining or obtaining the basic
knowledge to fill out the personal information section of any form.
Remember, or take a look again at, the activities which gave you some good practice to have an idea on how to fill
out specific form sections. The activities seen in this unit provided you with good background and practice in order
to be able to complete the project efficiently.
Wrap up
You can include more personal information in the application form sections. You can ask other people to help you
fill out other sections from any form.
Here is a sample application form. Fill out the following sections to complete the project.
Personal information:
First Name: _____________________________
Middle Name: ___________________________
Last Name: _____________________________
Date of Birth: ____________________________
Marital Status: ___________________________
Home Phone Number: (___) ________________
Cell Phone Number: (___) __________________
Email address: __________________________
Home address: __________________________
If you are under age 18, do you have an employment/age certificate?
Yes ___ No ___

Resources
For an online dictionary:
http://dictionary.reverso.net/english-spanish/
For more on greetings and introductions:

http://www.elearnenglishlanguage.com/ingles/vocabulario/saludos.html
http://www.english-at-home.com/speaking/english-greetings/
For more practice with the alphabet and the spelling of words:
http://www.learnenglish.de/basics/alphabet.htm
For more practice with cardinal numbers and telephone numbers:

http://www.ego4u.com/en/cram-up/vocabulary/numbers/exercises?param=101&type=cardinal
http://fog.ccsf.cc.ca.us/~lfried/activity/listening/ex1phoneex.html
http://www.learnenglish.de/basics/numbers.htm
For more practice with colors and office vocabulary:

http://www.englisch-hilfen.de/en/exercises/various/colours_smilies.htm
http://www.happychild.org.uk/freeway/french/vocab/office00.htm
For more practice with irregular plural forms:

http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwesl/egw/crump.htm
http://educorp.org/giveorders.htm
For more information in the “Language in use” sections, take a look at these
books:
Basic Grammar Use by Cambridge University Press
Fundamentals of English Grammar by Longman

ENGLISH
Unit 2
We are from El Salvador
Objectives:
Use vocabulary related to family ties, languages and nationalities
in both oral and written discourse. Give general information
pertaining to age, nationality, number of family members, jobs,
occupations and languages.
Express moods and personal qualities to describe characteristics of
family members both orally and in written discourse.
UNIT 2
Unit 2
We are from
El Salvador
Listening Grammar
Speaking Vocabulary
Writing

Family Moods, Countries, nationali- Jobs and Cardinal
member and emotions and ties and languages occupations numbers from 100
expressions physical to 200
of self descriptions
identification
Unit guidelines
In this unit you will learn how to express information about your family members and yourself, describe them
physically and emotionally, and give their nationality, language, and age. You may also learn more about Salvadoran
customs, traditions, values and activities. As an independent learner, it is recommended that you keep track of your
own learning progress.

In this unit you will work on the second part of the project called “Filling out a job application form.” The second part
of the project focuses more on the sections including work availability, educational background, employment history,
and personal references. This project will be beneficial to you because you will be able to fill out a real application
form by the end of this unit.
Look at the following URL to print a sample application form and continue with part two of the project:
http://jobsearch.about.com/od/jobappsamples/a/printableapp.htm

Unit Two Lesson 1
How is your family?
Getting started!
Q
¿ ué es un árbol genealógico?
¿Cómo se dicen los miembros de tu familia en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen los miembros de la familia de tu
esposo o esposa en Inglés?
¿Cómo presentas a toda la familia a otros en Inglés?
I can draw a family tree and write a textual transcription of family I can use the correct words to identify family members.
relationships.
Which of the following are names of family members?
1. sister 2. friend 3. brother 4. boy 5. father 6. girl 7. mother

Activity 1
identify the greetings.
Answer the following questions according to the
A: Hi. How are your children, Mary? previous conversation.
B: Hello, Mark. They are okay. Thank you. How 1. How are Mary’s children?
about yours?
A: They’re not bad. 2. Where is Mark’s mother?
B: By the way, how is your mother? 3. How are Mark’s children?
A: Oh! She is fine. She is in La Union with her family. 4. How many brothers and sisters does Mark’s
B: How many brothers and sisters does your mother mother have?
have, Mark?
A: She has two brothers and three sisters.
Now practice the conversation by repeating it out loud.
Don’t forget!
The word “children” refers to all sons and daughters
in a family no matter if they are young or old,
married or single. The word child is singular and
means son or daughter.
Glossary:
Children: sons and daughters, the plural form of “child”
Glad to hear that: to be happy about hearing some news or information.

UNIT 2
Enrich your vocabulary Grandparents

A Family Tree
A family tree is a chart representing family relationships
in a conventional structure resembling a tree. This Grandmother Grandfather
structure is normally presented from the top to the
bottom. The oldest generations are written at the top and
the newer generations are at the bottom. Father
Every member of the family has a direct relationship with Mother/ Wife
Husband
other members. Family members represented in a family
tree include: grandmother, grandfather, mother, father,
son, and daughter. Son Father
Brother Sister
Look at this example of a basic family tree.
2 Activity Children
Grandchildren
Match the family members on the right with their definitions
on the left.
Family members Definitions
1 grandmother A a female parent
2 grandfather B a male parent
3 sister C a male child of the parents
4 brother D a female child of the parents
5 daughter E a son of the same parents as
another person
6 son F a daughter of the same parents as
another person
7 father G father of a person who has children
8 mother H mother of a person who has children
3 Activity
Listen to the following sentences and choose the word that best completes each statement.
sons daughter- in- law granddaughter grandson brother wife
1. Maria and Pedro have two__. David and Tomas. 4. Tomas’s __ , Laura, is 25 years old, and she has a boy.
2. David and his __Tomas are both 25 years old, and 5. Pedro and Maria’s __, Ana, is six months old.
they are twins. 6. Their __, Boris, is 10 years old.
3. Pedro and Maria’s __ ,Doris, is 23 years old, and she
has a baby girl.

UNIT 2
Time to read
Listen to and read the following description of a family.
Activity 5
Look up any new words in a dictionary. Complete the following chart of family relationships by
writing the opposite family members. The first has been
done for you.
1 husband wife
2 son
3 mother-in-law
4 uncle
5 niece
6 grandfather
7 sister
8 grandson
9 sister-in-law
Activity 6
Describing the Martinez family Rearrange the following letters to form words that are
Juan Martinez is married to Alicia. She is his wife and family members.
he is her husband. They have a daughter and a son. The
son’s name is Horacio and the daughter’s name is Luisa. Example: horadgmthner - grandmother
They live next to Alicia’s parents, Artemio and Rosemary. 1. agdtuehr
Artemio is Alicia’s father and Rosemary is her mother. 2. osn
Artemio is Juan’s father-in-law and Rosemary is his
3. rbthoer
mother-in-law. Horacio is Artemio’s grandson, and Luisa
is Rosemary’s granddaughter. Alicia has a sister and a 4. enriachrngdld
brother. Her sister’s name is Maria, and her brother’s 5. fathre
name is Francis. Francis has two children, David and 6. othemr
Sofia. Sofia is Alicia’s niece, and David is Alicia’s nephew.
Alicia is their aunt and Juan is their uncle.
4 Activity
Answer the following questions.

1. Who is Juan in relation to Alicia?
2. Who is Alicia in relation to Horacio?
3. Who is Rosemary in relation to Luisa?
4. Who is Sofia in relation to Alicia?
5. Who is Juan in relation to David?
6. Who is Artemio in relation to Juan?
Glossary: Nephew: the son of your brother or sister.
Mother- in- law and father-in-law: the parents of your spouse. Uncle and aunt: the brother and sister of your parents.
Niece: the daughter of your brother or sister.

UNIT 2

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully
and repeat them out loud. Look up any new words in
a dictionary.
Conversation 1
A: Hi, Lola. How are you today?
B: Hi, Sofia. I’m fine thank you. How about you?
A: Well, I am great! I am really happy.
B: Why? What’s new?
A: My older brother will get married this weekend in
Los Angeles.
B: Good for your brother. Are you excited to go to
Los Angeles? Conversation 2
A: Of course. I leave on Friday evening. I look forward A: Hello, Luis.
to meeting my future sister-in-law. B: Hi, Pablo. How are you?
B: Will you stay long? A: I’m fine thanks, and you?
A: Yes, and I will look for a part time job over there. B: Not bad. Luis, this is my brother-in-law Carlos.
B: Have a nice trip! Carlos, this is Luis, my coworker at the World
Trade Center.
C: Nice to meet you, Luis.
A: Nice meeting you, too. Do you live around here?
C: No, I live in San Francisco, but I’m from
Ahuachapan originally.
A: What do you do in San Francisco, Carlos?
C: I am the general manager of a construction
company.
A: Are there any openings in your company? I am
an architect.
C: Yes, Luis. You can fill out the job application
form that is online. Be careful in the employment
history section. Try to give accurate phone
7 Activity numbers and former positions held...
Decide whether the following statements are true or false

based on the previous conversation. Activity 8
1. Lola is going to Los Angeles.
2. Sofia’s brother will get married. Answer the following questions about conversation 2.
3. Sofia will work full time. 1. What is Carlos in relation to Pablo?
4. Sofia is leaving on Monday. A. his brother-in-law
B. his son-in-law
Hands on! 1F
2. Where does Carlos live?
Some application forms ask if you have any family A. He lives in San Salvador.
members that work for the company or have
worked for the company in the past. You may need B. He lives in San Francisco.
to state their name, position, and relation to you.
Glossary: Live around here: live near this place.

Look forward to: to have a great desire or wish. Chance: opportunity.
Stay long: to spend a long time in a place. Get married: when two people exchange vows in a wedding ceremony.
Will: the action will take place in the future. Fill out: to answer the information on a form.

UNIT 2

Genealogy Activity 9
Genealogy is the study of families and the tracing of their
lineages and history. Genealogists use oral traditions, Choose the letter that best answers each question according to
historical records, genetic analysis, and other records the previous article.
to obtain information about a family. Another aspect of
genealogy is the description of descent of a person, family, 1. When was Rosa Elda Martinez born?
or group from an ancestor or ancestors. A. February 7, 1958
B. February 2, 1950
C. February 2, 1951
2. Where was she born?

A. Spain
B. El Salvador
C. Los Angeles
3. How many brothers and sisters did she have?

A. eleven
B. eight
C. ten
Time to read
Listen and read the following article about the genealogy of 4. Where was Rosa’s father from originally?
a family carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary. A. Spain
B. El Salvador
My family roots
C. Los Angeles
Rosa Elda Martinez was born on February 2, 1950 in San
Salvador, El Salvador. She is the eighth of nine children. Her
father, Leonardo Martinez, was originally from Barcelona, 5. In what year did Rosa’s parents marry?
Spain, but his family moved to El Salvador around 1935. A. 1940
Rosa’s mother, Felicita Diaz, was the youngest of B. 1980
ten brothers and sisters. Felicita and Leonardo were
married in 1940. Rosa’s family went to the United States C. 1981
during the Salvadoran Civil War in 1980. Their family
experienced many hardships. Rosa lived in Los Angeles 6. Rosa’s family migrated to the United States
and met her future husband in 1981. Rosa and Miguel because of __.
Ayala got married in 1982 and are the parents of four A. war
children. I am one of those children.
B. poverty
C. severe unemployment
What for?
Learning about your roots and knowing about your 7. How many children did Miguel and Rosa Martinez
family lineage and history is important. Have your have?
ancestors made contributions to the present generation? A. five
Continue your family heritage with future generations B. four
by telling the history of your ancestors.
C. nine
Glossary: Got: the past tense of “get”.

Tracing: to track or to record. Hardship: struggles or difficulties.
Lineage: order of descent.
Moved: the past tense of “move” which means to live in another place.

UNIT 2
Language in use
The possessive form of nouns is called the genitive case
The possessive form is used with nouns referring to people, groups of people, countries, and animals. “Belonging to” or
“ownership” is one of the relationships it expresses. Add “-’s” (apostrophe + s) to the end of the noun.
Examples:
the car of John = John’s car
the room of the girls = the girls’ room
jobs for men = men’s jobs
Read and study the following genitive case table.

Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3 Rule 4
If the noun is plural and Singular nouns can The basic rule is; if the For compound subjects, add
ends in -s, just add an ’ be made possessive noun is singular and the -’s to the last element.
(apostrophe). simply by adding -'s. ends in -s add -’s.
Examples:
sisters’ names restaurant’s food James’s sister Juan and Karla’s
girls’ house brother’s name Thomas’s father Mary and James’s
bosses’ office sister’s name boss’s office the girl and boy’s
Make the possessive form of the nouns given below. Complete the following sentences using the words given below.
Example: My __ house is in La Palma. (brother)
cousins father grandmother
My brother’s house is in La Palma.
nephew uncle grandchildren
niece aunt
1. My __ shirt is purple. (friend)
2. The __ books are on the TV. (girls) 1. My mother’s husband is my __.
3. It’s __ birthday on Sunday. (John) 2. My father’s brother is my __.
4. Do you have __ newspaper? (today) 3. My uncle’s children are my __.
5. The __ bags are in the living room. (children) 4. My father’s sister is my __.
6. My __ office is next to mine. (boss) 5. My mother is my daughter’s __.
7. Your uncle is your __ brother. (father) 6. My son and my daughter are my father’s __.
8. Your aunt is your __ sister. (mother) 7. My sister’s son is my __.
9. My __ birthdays are next week. (friends) 8. My brother’s daughter is my __.

UNIT 2
12 Activity 6. I love my brother, but I don’t like Sofia, his __.

They’ve been married for three years.
A. wife
Choose the letter that best completes each sentence. B. sister
C. daughter
1. You know Rosa has two children, a son and a __. D. girlfriend
A. daughter
B. girl
7. My sister has a new __. They have been dating for
C. husband
2 months.
D. cousin A. boyfriend
B. class
2. Alicia’s father and my father are brothers. We’re __. C. mother
A. parents D. girlfriends
B. sons
C. cousins
8. In the U.S. it’s normal to live with your __ when
D. nephews you are 18, but not when you are 50.
A. sisters
3. I have two brothers, Mario and Cesar, and a younger B. parents
__ called Mary. C. children
A. nephew D. brothers
B. son
C. girl 9. My sister met her __ when they were studying in the
D. sister university and they got married soon after graduating.
A. brother
B. stepfather
4. My sister has had a baby, so now I’m an __.
C. husband
A. parent
B. uncle
D. parent
C. cousin
D. grandparent 10. My uncle and aunt live in Houston, so I don’t see
my __ very often.
A. cousins
5. There are three generations in my house. My __, B. sisters
my parents, and myself.
C. grandchildren
A. nephews
D. nephews
B. cousins
C. grandparents
D. uncles Lesson core
Conociste las palabras que se utilizan para expresar las diferentes miembros que
componen la familia. Además, utilizaste otras palabras para mencionar a los parientes
tanto de tu madre como de tu padre y la relación o parentesco que ellos tienen hacia ti.
Hiciste tu propio árbol genealógico de forma mental y física, así como de otras personas
y encontraste el parentesco de los mismos. Tuviste acceso a conocer y practicar como
se estructura la forma posesiva de los sustantivos en Inglés ya sea en forma singular
o plural. Finalmente practicaste como preguntar información básica acerca de los
parientes y familiares de otras personas en Inglés de forma práctica y sencilla.

UNIT 2
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following is an

example that uses the genitive case? 3 Which statement is not correct?
a) Your mother’s sister is your aunt.
a) When’s your birthday? b) Your father’s brother is your uncle.
b) What’s up? c) Your brother’s sister is your cousin.
c) Where’s your sister? d) Your mother’s husband is your father.
d) My sister’s name is Iris.
2 Which sentence is correct?

a) My friend’ house is big. 4 Who are your grandparents?
a) Your mother’s sisters.
b) Your sisters’s boyfriends are my b) Your father’s brother.
best friends. c) Your father’s parents.
c) Our parents’ families are large. d) Your mother’s parents.
d) Juan’s and Nelson’s brothers
study English.
4. c, d 3.c 2. c 1. d Answers:
FAMILY TREE
The family tree is very important if you really

want to know about your roots and origin. The
lineage of your family offers you the opportunity
to learn about your ancestors. Furthermore, you
may find out about things they did or incidents
that happened to them in the past, which have
contributed positively to your present family. So
when you’re really interested in learning about
your past, you should investigate your family tree
or ask an expert to find out more information.
You may also want to try an online search to
discover more information about
your family.

Unit Two Lesson 2
What does your father look like?
Getting started!
Cómo se describen a las personas en Inglés?
¿
¿Cuáles son las diferentes personalidades?
¿Cuáles son los diferentes estados de ánimo?
¿Cómo se describe a uno mismo tanto en lo físico
como en lo anímico y en su personalidad?
I can use descriptive adjectives for mood and physical description I can correctly incorporate the auxiliary do/does in negative and
of family members in a given context with no or few grammatical interrogative statements.
mistakes and accurate pronunciation. I can read a list of adjectives describing mood with correct pronunciation.
I can describe someone’s mood with respect.
Which words describe people physically?

1. tall 2. happy 3. fat 4. short 5. angry 6. thin 7. sad 8. beautiful
Conversation 2
Conversation and more A: Hello, Gabriela. How are you?
Listen to and read the following conversations and B: Hi, Luisa. I’m fine. What about you?
identify the words that describe people physically. Look A: I’m very happy. Guess what?
up any new words in a dictionary. B: No idea. Tell me, please.
A: I have a new boyfriend.
Conversation 1 B: Oh my God! Who is he? What does he look like?
A: Hi, Nick. What’s new? A: Well, his name is Nick. He is short and a little fat
B: Hello, Peter. I have some good news. but handsome.
A: What is it, Nick? B: Congratulations! I know you like that kind of guy.
B: I have a new girlfriend.
A: Really? Who is she? What does she look like?
B: I have a picture of her. Her name is Gabriela. She
is tall, thin and beautiful.
A: Good for you, man.
Don’t forget!
Use descriptive adjectives to talk about physical

characteristics or physical appearances. The
question “What does it look like?” is used to ask
for a physical description.

UNIT 2

Descriptive adjectives are used to describe physical appearances.
Read and study the following adjectives and other words to express physical characteristics.
What does he or she look like?
He is fat. She is thin. He is chubby. She is tall. He is short. He is handsome.
She is beautiful. They are ugly. She has long hair. He has short hair. He has black hair.
He has brown hair. He has a mustache. She has blond hair. He has a beard. He is bald.
Describe your mother or your father. Use the adjectives shown What do you look like? Try to describe yourself.
above in your descriptions.
My mother is…. I am…
My mother has… I have ….
My father is …
My father has…

UNIT 2
Time to read
Listen to and read the following passage about the
Activity 3
description of a family member carefully. Look up any Decide whether the following statements are true or false
new words in a dictionary. according to the passage.
1. Aunt Conchita is my mother’s youngest sister.
2. She is in her early sixties.
3. She lives with her husband.
4. She has thick, black hair.
5. Her face is a little wrinkled.
6. She likes dancing and watching TV.
7. She is an active person.
8. She isn’t extremely generous.
9. She is very tolerant with all people.
Activity 4
Complete the following sentences by choosing the correct verb
My Aunt Conchita form provided in parentheses.
Of all my relatives, I like my Aunt Conchita the best.
She is my mother’s oldest sister. She has never married, 1. My mother (has/is) 45 years old.
and she lives alone in a small town near my hometown.
2. My father (has/is) a big mustache.
She’s in her late sixties, but she’s still quite young in spirit.
She has a fair complexion and thick, gray hair which 3. My sister (has/is) good looking.
she wears in a bun. She has a kind face that when you
4. My brother (has/is) tall and thin.
meet her, the first thing you notice is her warm, lovely
smile. Her face is a little wrinkled now, but I think she is 5. My uncle (has/is) bald.
still rather attractive. She is the sort of person you can 6. My aunt (has/is) black hair.
always go to if you have a problem. She likes reading and
gardening, and she goes for long walks over the hills
with her dog Blacky. She’s a very active person. She’s
either making something or mending something or
doing something to help others. She does the shopping Activity 5
for some of the old people in her town. She’s extremely
generous but not very tolerant with people who don’t Write an original description of one of your relatives whom
agree with her. I hope that I can be as happy and content you like the best. You can follow the previous reading passage
as she is when I am her age. as a model.
Glossary: Wrinkled: prominent lines because of the age.

Hometown: the place where you were born. Gardening: taking care of the garden.
In her late sixties: almost 70 years old. Mending: restoring or fixing things.
Bun: put into a tight knot.

UNIT 2

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully.
Activity 6
Look up any new words in a dictionary. Choose the letter that best answers the questions according
to conversation 1.
1. Is Oscar’s older brother 25 years old?
A. yes
B. no
2. How old is Oscar’s sister?

A. 22
B. 15
Conversation 1 3. Who is tall and thin?

A: Can you tell me about your family, Oscar? A. Oscar’s younger brother
B: Sure. I have two brothers and one sister. B. Oscar’s older brother
A: How old are they?
B: My older brother is 25 and the younger is 22. My Conversation 2
sister is 15 years old. A: Hi, Manuel. What’s up?
A: Oh. What do they look like? B: Hello, Julio. Nothing much. How about you?
B: Miguel is my older brother. He is short and well- A: Fine. I want another job. I saw your younger sister
built. He has short, brown hair. Katherine in the Human Resources department at
Mauricio is my younger brother. He is tall and Telecommunications Around yesterday.
thin. He has long, black hair. Katherine is my sister. B: Yes, she wants a job. Can you help her?
She is thin and beautiful. She has wavy, brown hair. A: Of course. I am the manager’s assistant in the
A: You and your brothers and sister look very Human Resources department. Tell her to bring
different. What do your parents look like? me her updated resume.
B: My mother is fairly short and a little chubby. She B: Hey! Thanks a lot, Julio. She has the application
has dark skin and short, black hair. form, but she needs help to fill it out.
My father is quite different. He is tall and thin. He A: Tell her not to worry. I will help her with it if she
has fair skin and wavy, brown hair. comes to see me in my office.
A: You definitely resemble your father.
B: What about you, Helen? Tell me about
your family.
A: Well, I have… Activity 7
Choose the letter that best answers the questions about
conversation 2.
1. Who is looking for another job?
A. Katherine
B. Julio
2. Who is looking for a first job?

A. Manuel
B. Katherine
Glossary: Fairly: kind of or more or less.

Well-built: muscular. Saw: the past tense form of the verb “see”.
Wavy: kind of curly. Updated: bring up to date or revise.
Resemble: look a lot like or be similar to. Resume: curriculum vitae.

UNIT 2

Descriptive adjectives are also used to describe emotions
and moods as well as personality traits or characteristics.
Activity 8
1. Read and study the following table of adjectives Choose the best creative name to form adjectives which
used to express moods and emotions. describe the people.
1. Mr. __ likes meeting people at parties.
How do you feel?
A. Outgoing
Mood or emotion Example B. Ingoing
sad You look sad today. C. Upgoing
happy I am really happy.
angry Why are you angry? 2. Mrs. __ will always be relaxed and open to anything.
shy Your sister is very shy. A. upgoing
furious We are furious today. B. outgoing
quiet Your mother is always quiet. C. easygoing
pleased They are pleased about that.
disappointed She seems to be disappointed. 3. Mr. __ knows he is good at everything.
2. Read and study the following table of adjectives A. Self-confident
used to express personality traits. B. Demanding
What are you like? C. Selfish
Personality trait Example

4. Miss __ wants to be good, better, the best.
She is outgoing because she likes
outgoing A. Energetic
to try new things.
He is easygoing; he never B. Aggressive
easygoing shows stress. C. Ambitious
My brother is stubborn because
stubborn he always wants it his way.
5. Miss __ enjoys finding faults with things.
I’m very responsible because I’m
responsible A. Fussy
always on time.
He is selfish because he never B. Critical
selfish shares with others. C. Insincere
hard-working All Salvadorans are hard-working.
My wife is not possessive; she 6. Mrs. __ is like an unwilling donkey.
possessive always gives to others. A. Selfish
You are self-confident because B. Stubborn
self-confident you belive in yourself.
C. Unpredictable
My friend is ambitious because she
ambitious wants to start her own business.
7. Mr. __ never lets his wife go anywhere
without him.
What for? A. Materialistic
B. Possessive
It is a good idea to express your mood to others so C. Selfish
they can understand the way you are at a certain
time of the day.

UNIT 2
Language in use
1. To express and ask about physical appearance, use the following questions and statements.
Question word Auxiliary Subject Complement Possible answers
I I am short and well-built.
you You are tall and fat.
What do look like?
we We have short, black hair.
they They are handsome.
Question word Auxiliary Subject Complement Possible answers

he He is young and handsome.
What does she look like? She is beautiful.
it It looks very old and small.
2. To ask about personality traits, use the following questions. You can express short answers about your
personality like the following examples.
Question word Verb “be” Subject Complement Possible answers

am I I am outgoing.
you You are easygoing.
What like?
are we We are very friendly.
they They are polite.
Question word Verb “be” Subject Complement Possible answers

he He is young and handsome.
What is she like? She is beautiful.
it It looks very old and small.
9 Activity

1. What is your mother like? 4. What are you like?
A. She’s outgoing. A. I really like to eat.
B. She works in a bank. B. I’m a responsible person.
2. What do your brothers look like? 5. What does your father look like?
A. They are very young and handsome. A. He is an important person.
B. They like to play soccer. B. He is short and chubby.
3. What does your best friend look like?
A. She likes to watch talk shows.
B. She is tall, fat, and friendly.

UNIT 2
10 Activity

1. What’s she like? 4. What do you like doing?
A. She’s tall with long, dark hair. A. I’m quite shy really.
B. She likes playing tennis. B. I’m short with long, black hair.
C. She’s really friendly. C. Pretty much any sport, really.
2. What does she like doing? 5. What does he look like?

A. She likes dancing. A. He’s look short, dark hair and brown eyes.
B. She’s tall and very graceful. B. He is short, dark hair and brown eyes.
C. She’s really talkative. C. He has short, dark hair and brown eyes.
3. What do you look like? 6. What is he like?

A. I’m friendly with a good sense of humor. A. He likes playing computer games.
B. Playing tennis. B. He’s great fun to be around.
C. I’m tall, and blonde with blue eyes. C. He’s tall, dark and handsome.
Hands on! 1G
Activity 11
Employers ask interested applicants what their
availability is. This includes which days of the Listen to and repeat the following questions out loud.
week they can work, the number of hours they Then answer the questions with your own information.
can work, and the day they can start working. 1. What is your mother like?
These things should be considered before
2. What do your brothers look like?
applying for a job.
3. What are you like?
4. What do you look like?
Lesson core
Conociste y practicaste las diferentes formas que se utilizan para preguntar acerca
de la descripción física tanto de tus parientes y familiares cercanos como de otras
personas que no forman parte de tu familia. Además, tuviste la oportunidad de
practicar como se describen los rasgos de la personalidad de tus parientes, familiares y
de otras personas en ingles en una forma sencilla, utilizando una variedad de adjetivos
calificativos y descriptivos. Finalmente, conociste y practicaste una variedad de
palabras que se utilizan para describir el estado anímico de las personas en Inglés.

UNIT 2
Self evaluation
1 Which statement describes a

person physically? 3 Which word expresses a mood
or emotion?
a) She is friendly. a) chubby
b) We have black hair. b) easygoing
c) They are outgoing. c) happy
d) I am very shy. d) young
2 Which statement describes a

personality trait? 4 Which questions are used to ask for
physical and personality description?
a) You are fine. a) What is your mother’s name?
b) Your mother is patient. b) What do you look like?
c) He is 22 years old. c) How do you do?
d) She is sad. d) What is your boyfriend like?
4. b, d 3.c 2. b 1. b Answers:
FAMILY MEMBERS
For many people, it is difficult to talk about
their families, especially if a good relationship
does not exist between family members. The
majority of people begin by talking about the
physical characteristics or appearance of their
brothers, sisters and parents. But when people
ask about your family, you may want to express
some basic information about them such as
their names, ages, occupations, and some of
their personality traits. To be able to understand
your family members better, you should observe
their behaviors and interact with them every
day. Once you begin to know every member of
your family and their unique personalities, you
can start to know how to treat them better.

Unit Two Lesson 3
Where are you from originally?
Getting started!
C
¿ ómo se dicen las diferentes nacionalidades más
comunes en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen y los diferentes países o lugares de
origen en Inglés?
¿Cuáles son lo diferentes idiomas que se más se
hablan en la mayoría de los continentes?
¿Cómo se escriben los diferentes idiomas,
nacionalidades y países más conocidos en Inglés?
I can describe my family members and other people’s nationalities I can exchange information about myself and others.
and languages.
Which of the following are the names of countries? Conversation 2

A. Canada B. Canadian C. German D. French E. France
F. China G. Chinese A: Excuse me, Rodrigo. Can you help me?
B: Sure. What can I do for you?
A: What does “rendezvous” mean?
B: Oh! It’s a word from France that means meeting
Conversation and more or reunion.
Listen to and read the following conversations carefully A: Can you speak French, Rodrigo?
and repeat them out loud. Look up any new words in B: Just a little bit.
a dictionary. A: That’s great!
Conversation 1
A: Hi, Gloria. How’s everything?
B: Hello, Gaby. I’m pretty good. How about you? Activity 1
A: I am okay. Long time no see. Where have
you been? Which are the countries and nationalities mentioned in
B: In Toronto, Canada with my brother- in-law. conversations 1 and 2?
A: Your sister Isabel is married to a Canadian,
isn’t she?
B: No, she isn’t. She is married to a Chinese man, but
he’s a resident of Canada.
A: Can he speak Spanish?
B: No, he can’t. He only speaks English.
Glossary: Just a little bit: a few words.

Where have you been?: where were you? Long time no see: I haven’t seen you in a long time.
Resident: a permanent inhabitant.

UNIT 2

Study the following table that shows the country, language and nationality of some countries from around the world.
Endings Country Language Nationality

France French French
one syllable
Greece Greek Greek
Britain English British
Denmark Danish Danish
ends in ‘-ish’ Poland Polish Polish
Spain Spanish Spanish
Turkey Turkish Turkish
Germany German German
ends in ‘-an’ Mexico Spanish Mexican
the United States English American
Australia English Australian
Brazil Portuguese Brazilian
Egypt Arabic Egyptian
ends in ‘-ian’ or ‘-ean’ Italy Italian Italian
Hungary Hungarian Hungarian
Korea Korean Korean
Russia Russian Russian
China Chinese Chinese
ends in ‘-ese’ Japan Japanese Japanese
Portugal Portuguese Portuguese
2 Activity
Choose the letter that best answers each statement.

1. He’s from Brazil. He’s __. 3. We’re from Italy. We’re __.
A. Brazilish A. Italien
B. Brazilian B. Italian
C. Brazilese C. Italiun
2. I’m from Colombia. I can speak __. 4. My friend is from Korea. He can speak __.
A. Spanish A. Korish
B. Colombian B. Korean
C. Colombish C. Koreanese

UNIT 2
Time to read
Listen to and read the following article carefully. Look up
Activity 4
any new words in a dictionary. Choose the letter that best answers each question according to
the previous article.
1. Where is Guillermo from?
A. Germany
B. El Salvador
C. Spain
D. Canada
2. Where is his wife from?

A. New York
B. Texas
C. Boston
D. Italy
My friend Guillermo
My friend’s name is Guillermo Escobar. Guillermo 3. Where are they now?
is from San Salvador, El Salvador. He is Salvadoran. A. Madrid
He is married and has two children. His wife Jenny is B. Boston
American. She is from Texas in the United States. Her
family is still in Texas, but she now works and lives with C. Milan
Guillermo in Milan, Italy. They speak English, Spanish, D. El Salvador
German and Italian! Their children are students in an
international primary school. They go to school with 4. Where is Jenny’s family now?
other children from all over the world. Abigail, their A. USA
daughter, has friends from France, Germany, Australia B. France
and Portugal. Harold, their son, goes to school with
students from South Africa, China, Spain and Canada. C. El Salvador
Of course, there are many children from Italy. Can you D. Germany
imagine? French, German, Portuguese, Australian,
South African, American, Italian, Spanish and Canadian
children all learning together in Italy!
Decide whether the statements are true or false according Answer the following questions with your own information.
to the previous article.
1. Where is your father originally from?
1. Jenny is Canadian. 2. Where is your mother originally from?
2. Guillermo is Spanish. 3. Where is your grandfather originally from?
3. There are many children from different countries 4. Where is your grandmother originally from?
at the school.
5. Where are you originally from?
4. There are children from Australia at the school.
5. Jenny speaks French.
6. Harold has Salvadoran classmates.
Glossary:
Still: at present.
Primary school: a school for children.

UNIT 2

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
A: Margarita! How are you? A: Excuse me, sir. Can you help me, please?
B: Rocio? Rocio! Oh, hello. I’m fine thanks. And you? B: Yes, sir. How can I help you?
A: I am on vacation in El Salvador with my husband. A: I don’t know what “nationality” means and I need
B: Are you married? Where do you live? to complete this form.
A: I live in New York. I married to an American. B: Let me see. Where are you from?
B: What about your mother Mariana? A: I am from San Vicente.
A: Well, she is doing well. She is in Australia with B: Where is San Vicente?
my uncle. A: It’s in El Salvador.
B: That’s nice. B: Then your nationality is Salvadoran.
A: How about you, Margarita? What’s new? A: Oh! I see now. Thanks a lot.
B: Nothing much. I’m married and I have two B: You’re welcome.
children, but they’re with their father now.
A: Where are they?
B: They are in Quebec, Canada.
A: Are they on vacation over there? What for?
B: Yes, they will spend four months there.
A: I know people in Quebec speak English and French. Remember that every person has a nationality
B: That’s right. My children are learning both languages. and speaks a native language depending on the
A: Oh Margarita, it was pleasure to hear from you country they live in or where they have grown up.
again. Take care.
B: You, too. Bye.
Answer the following questions about conversation 1. Answer the following questions about conversation 2.
1. Where is Rocio’s husband from? 1. What’s the man’s nationality?
2. Where is Margarita’s mother now? 2. Where is San Vicente?
3. Where is Margarita’s husband?
4. Are Margarita’s children learning French and
English in Canada?
Glossary: Both: two people or things.

Quebec: a place in Canada.
Spend: to stay in a place for a short time.

UNIT 2

Continents Activity 8
A continent is one of the world’s main continuous pieces
of land. The word continent comes from the Latin “terra Choose the letter that best answers the following statements.
continens”, meaning “continuous land”. How many
continents are there? Unfortunately, even the experts 1. Jim is from Berlin. His nationality is __.
cannot agree on how to distinguish the continents:
A. Germany
7 Continents: Africa, Antarctica, Asia, Europe, B. German
Australia, North America, South C. Dutch
America
6 Continents: Africa, Antarctica, Eurasia, North
America, Australia, South America 2. Carlos is from New York. His nationality is __.
6 Continents: Africa, America, Antarctica, Asia,
A. Mexican
Europe, Australia
5 Continents: Africa, America, Antarctica, Eurasia, B. American
Australia C. Canadian
4 Continents: Afro-Eurasia, America, Antarctica,
Australia
3.
Sarah is from London. Her nationality is __.
Europe Asia A. British
B. Irish
C. Scottish
America Africa 4.
Michelle is from Paris. Her nationality is __.
Australia A. France
B. French
C. English
This chart lists what is probably the most widely-
accepted number of continents (7), and shows the 5.
David is from Madrid. His nationality is __.
corresponding adjective and the noun used for a person
from each continent: A. French
B. Italian
C. Spanish
Continent Adjective Person
Africa African an African 6. Nikole is from Sydney. Her nationality is __.
Antarctica Antarctic -
A. British
Asia Asian an Asian
B. Australian
Europe European a European
C. Austrian
North North a North American
America American
Australia Australian an Australian
South South a South American
America American
Glossary:
Hold on for a second: wait.
At hand: nearby or in your hand.

UNIT 2
Language in use
Where do you come from? and Where are you from? are both Hands on! 1H
questions that ask about the origin of a person. If you
ask these questions to someone who is not from your Application forms ask for your educational
country, he might answer with the name of his country. background. You should list the schools
If you ask these questions to someone from El Salvador, and universities that you have attended, your
he might answer with the name of his hometown. But major, degrees or diplomas obtained, and your
Where do you come from? is also a way to ask about the last graduation dates.
place you were in. The answer can be a city, a building,
a park or any other place. Where are you from? always
means the place you were born.
To ask for someone’s country of origin, you can use the

following question forms:
Activity 9
Question Answer the following questions about famous people.
Verb Complement Possible answers
word
you from? I am from 1. Where is Madonna from?
Portugal. 2. Where is Diego Maradona from?
they from? They are 3. Where is Ronaldo from?
Where are from Cuba.
4. Where is Pele from?
we from? We are from
El Salvador. 5. Where is Elvis Presley from?
she from? She’s from the
United States.
is
Where he from He is
from France.
it from? It’s from China.
To ask for someone’s nationality, you can use the
following question forms:
Question Possible
Verb Complement
word answers
your It’s Salvadoran.
nationality?
Miguel’s
What is It’s American.
nationality?
their It’s French.
nationality?
Verb Subject Nationality Yes / No answers

you Korean? Yes, I am Korean.
Don’t forget!
Are No, they
they Japanese? aren’t Japanese.
she Chinese? Yes, she is Chinese.
To know people’s nationality you can use the
Is questions “Where are you from originally?” and
he Chilean? No, he isn’t Chilean. “Where do you come from?”

UNIT 2
10 Activity
Choose the letter that best answers the following statements.
1. People from Canada are called __ . 6. People in Israel are __ .

A. Canuks A. Jewish
B. Canadians B. Israeli
C. Canadites C. Hebrew
2. People from India are __ . 7. People from Israel speak __ .

A. Indies A. Jewish
B. Hindus B. Israeli
C. Indians C. Hebrew
3. He’s from Germany. He is __ . 8. People in Hong Kong speak English and __ .

A. German A. Hangul
B. Germany B. Cantonese
C. Dutch C. Mandarin
4. She lives in Argentina. She speaks __ . 9. People from Ireland are __ .

A. Argentinian A. Irish
B. Spanish B. English
C. Portuguese C. Irelandish
5. She lives in Argentina. She is __ .

A. Argentinian
B. Argentese
Lesson core
C. Argentonian
Conociste varios nombres de países,

nacionalidades e idiomas que se hablan en esos
11 Activity mismos países. Además, leíste algunas lecturas
acerca de diferentes personas que hablaron de sus
familias dentro y fuera de El Salvador. Practicaste
Answer the following questions with your own information. como se escriben los diferentes continentes del
mundo y preguntaste la procedencia u origen
1. What is your nationality? de las personas en Inglés. También, conociste
2. What’s your mother’s nationality? varias formas de responder la nacionalidad y
procedencia de tus amigos y otras personas
3. Is your family from San Salvador? que te rodean. Finalmente, practicaste como
pronunciar diferentes nacionalidades, países e
idiomas en Inglés

UNIT 2
Self evaluation
1 Which is a nationality?
a) France 3 Which is a continent?
a) Germany
b) Spain b) Canada
c) Chinese c) Europe
d) Canada d) China
2 Which is a language?
a) Canadian 4 Which are the questions used to ask for
nationality?
b) Salvadoran a) Where do you live?
c) Spanish b) Where are you from?
d) American c) Are you in Mexico?
d) What’s her nationality?
4. b, d 3.c 2. c 1. c Answers:
SPEAKING ENGLISH
In today’s world, it is important to know how to
speak a foreign language, especially English.
Many doors can be opened by speaking the
English language properly. That is, several
opportunities for work and study may be
presented to you. If you want to get a good job
in a local business or an international company,
you should speak two languages fluently. If
you want to study abroad, many scholarships
are given if you speak English. Therefore, it is
important and necessary to study and practice
another language while you have the chance to
do it.

Unit Two Lesson 4
What do you do for a living?
Getting started!
C
¿ ómo se nombran las ocupaciones y lugares y trabajos en
Inglés?
¿Cómo pregunta por la ocupación de las personas se en Inglés?
¿De qué forma se expresan las responsabilidades o actividades
diarias en el trabajo en Inglés?
¿Cómo se llena un formulario en la parte relacionada a historial
y experiencia laboral en Inglés?
I can correctly incorporate the auxiliary do/does in negative and I can practice jobs and occupations in context.
interrogative statements.
Which of the following are jobs?

1. doctor 2. work 3. police officer 4. France 5. carpenter
Activity 1
6. study 7. teacher
Answer the following questions according to the previous
conversation.
Conversation and more 1. What’s Mr. White’s occupation?
Listen to and read the following conversation and 2. What is Mr. Smith’s occupation?
identify the occupations. Look up any new words in 3. Where does Mr. White work?
a dictionary.
A: Good evening. My name is Danilo White.

B: Good evening, Mr. White. I am Robert Smith.
A: Nice to meet you, Mr. Smith. I am here for the job
interview.
B: Nice meeting you, too. I am the Human Resources
Manager of this company. Sit down, please. I
want to ask you some questions… What’s your
occupation, Mr. White?
A: I am a certified accountant.
B: And do you work now?
A: Yes, I work at Global Account Company in Don’t forget!
San Salvador.
B: What are your responsibilities? To ask someone’s occupation you can use “What’s
A: I’m in charge of the accounting department… your occupation?” “What do you do?” or “What’s
your job?”
Glossary: Certified: authorized.

Job interview: a conversation for a new job. In charge: to supervise.
Human Resource Manager: the administrator of the personnel department.

UNIT 2

What’s an occupation?
An occupation is a specific type of job that a person may do in order to make a living. This may be found in a number
of different types of fields or industries. Listen to and repeat each occupation.
What do they do?
He’s an accountant. He’s a carpenter. She’s a doctor. They are fire fighters. She’s a gardener.
He’s a lawyer. She’s a nurse. He’s a manager. He’s a brick mason. He’s a plumber.
She’s a police officer. She’s a secretary. He’s a security guard. He’s a teacher. He’s a waiter, and
she’s a waitress.
2 Activity
Match the occupations with their duties to make complete sentences.

Occupations Duties
1 A police officer A constructs houses.
2 An actor B takes care of gardens.
3 A carpenter C counts money.
4 A doctor D makes clothes for people.
5 A tailor E takes care of sick people.
6 An accountant F makes things from wood.
7 A gardener G acts out plays in a theater.
8 A builder H captures criminals.

UNIT 2
Time to read
Listen to and read the following text about how to complete
Activity 3
a job application. Look up any new words in a dictionary. Decide whether the statements are true or false according
to the text.
1. First write down your education.
2. Begin your application form with
your references.
3. Begin with your first job and finish with the last.
4. Include languages spoken and computer skills.
5. Finish your application with references.
Activity 4
There are different ways to fill out an application form in Read the following statements and order them from 1 to 5
English. Here is one form: according to the previous article.
1. First, begin by writing your personal information: __ References

full name, address, telephone number, fax and __ Personal Information
email, which are at the beginning of __ Position/Availability
the application.
2. Second, write down the position you are applying __ Employment History
for as well as your availability - full time or __ Education
part time.
3. Third, summarize your education, including
important facts (degree type, specific courses Hands on! 1I
studied) that are applicable to the job you are
applying for. Another important part of a job application form
4. Take notes on your education. Include degree
is the employment history. This section includes
or certificates, major or course emphasis, school names, addresses and phone numbers of previous
names and courses. employers; supervisors’ names; dates of employment;
5. Include other relevant information such as
salary earned; and your reasons for leaving.
languages spoken, computer knowledge, etc.
6. After that, continue with your employment
history: First, take notes on your work experience,
full time and part time. Write down your
responsibilities, job titles and
company information.
7. Complete the “work experience” section with
your most recent job and finish with your first
job. Include: the company’s details and your
responsibilities.
8. Last, finish filling out your application form by
writing your references: people who know you and
can give information about you.
Glossary: Degree: certification.

Applying for: submitting an application. Knowledge: understanding or comprehension.
Facts: information or data. Address: exact place where you live.
Take notes: to write.

UNIT 2

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully
Activity 5
and practice them out loud. Look up any new words in Choose the letter that best answers the questions based on
a dictionary. conversation 1.
1. What does personal information include?
A. your name and telephone number
B. your personal references
2. What does employment history mean?

A. your present and previous jobs
B. your studies and degrees
Conversation 2
A: Hello, Daniela.
B: Hey. What’s new, John?
A: So far so good! And you?
B: I’m fine, thanks.
A: What about your application form?
B: Oh. I have it here. Can you take a look at it, please?
A: No problem! Let’s see.
B: Is it correct, John?
Conversation 1 A: Basically it’s correct, but it has a few
A: Hi, John. spelling mistakes.
B: Hello, Daniela. What’s new? B: Can you correct them, please?
A: Can I ask you something? A: Yes. Give me a few minutes.
B: Yes, of course. What is it? B: Thank you very much.
A: Do you know how to fill out a job application form
in English.
B: Yes, I do. First, you should begin with your
personal information- your age, full name, address
and telephone number. Second, you should
mention the position you are applying for and your
availability.
A: Let me write it down. First, personal information
and second the position.
B: Next, you should include information about your
education- degrees, diplomas, trainings and so
forth. Then, continue with your employment
history- from your present job to your first job.
A: Hold on, John! Next, information about my
education and then my employment history.
Then what? Activity 6
B: Finally, you should write your references- people
who know you that can give information Answer the following questions about conversation 2.
about you.
A: Thank you so much for your help, John. 1. Is Daniela’s application form correct?
B: You’re welcome. 2. What kind of mistakes does it have?
Glossary:
Take a look at: to examine.
Mistakes: errors or faults.

UNIT 2
Time to read
Read the following job application. Use a dictionary to look up any new vocabulary.
JOB APPLICATION
Position you are applying for Days available Hours available
___________________
Accountant Assistant _______________
From Monday to Saturday ______________
From 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.
Last Name First Middle
_______________________________
Castillo Miguel Angel
Street address Phone number

____________________________________________
Los Heroes Boulevard, Number 2345, San Salvador, El Salvador ____________
(503) 2445- 5847
Name and address of school- Degree/ Diploma Graduation date

____________________________________________________________________
Centro Escolar Las Nubes, San Salvador, El Salvador. High school diploma, 2001. Ninth grade certificate, 1999.
___________________________________________________________________
Present or most recent position Employer
_____________________
Accountant Assistant ________________
Global Account
Address
______________________________________________
Boulevard Los Proceres, Number 2367, San Salvador, El Salvador.
Supervisor Phone number E mail

_________________
John White ____________
2256- 5876 __________________
johnwhite@ gmail.com
Position title Date

_________________
Accounting Manager __________________
February 2008 to present
Responsabilities Salary
____________________
Accounting reports and payments _____________
$250.00/ month
Previous position Employer

__________________
Accountant Assistant _________________
Accounting Park
Supervisor Phone number Email

_______________
William Skims __________
2265- 3216 _____________
williamskinns@gmail.com
Salary Reason for leaving

______________
$200.00/ month ______________________
Move to another department
May we contact your present employer: ___

Yes
Please give the name, address, and telephone number of a reference not related to you
Rafael Polls. Main Street, Colonia San Jacinto, Number 45. Phone number: 2223- 8731.
__________________________________________________________________
Signature_____________________ Date_______________

UNIT 2
Answer the following questions according to the previous job Change each sentence into a Yes/No question.
application form. 1. He plays on a soccer team.
1. What position is he applying for? 2. We work in a hospital.
3. They live in Canada.
2. Where does he work now? 4. He teaches English.
5. She drinks coffee every day.
3. What’s Miguel’s address? 6. You study in your house.
7. It costs $50.00.
Language in use What for?

The auxiliary “do/does” is used in the simple present
tense to form negatives and questions.
To express present action in the negative form,
1. Forming a negative use the auxiliary “don’t” or “doesn’t” depending
Negatives in the simple present tense are formed by on the subject.
adding “don’t” or “doesn’t” before the simple form of
the verb. Study the table below.
2. Forming a Yes/No question
Auxiliary in negative Auxiliary in

Subject Auxiliary Auxiliary Subject Verb
sentences answers
I don't I don't work. Do I work? Yes, you do.
you don't You don't work. Do you work? No, I don't.
he doesn't He doesn't work. Does he work? Yes, he does.
she doesn't She doesn't work. Does she work? No, she doesn't.
it doesn't It doesn't work. Does it work? Yes, it does.
we don't We don't work. Do we work? Yes, we do.
they don't They don't work. Do they work? No, they don't.
3. Forming a Wh- word question
Question Auxiliary Complement Possible answers

words do/does
What do I do? You work every day.
Where do you work? I work in a bank.
How does he work? He works very hard.
Which does she like? She likes the red car.
How much does it cost? It costs $ 90.00.
When do we work? We work on Saturday.
Why do they work? Because they need money.

UNIT 2
9 Activity
Write the correct form of the word in parentheses to complete

the paragraph.
Elizabeth and I (1. work) in the same bank, but we’re
completely different. She (2. like) coffee, but I(3.not
like) coffee. She (4. wash) her car every weekend, but I
never (5. clean) mine. She (6. not smile) at work, but I
(7. laugh) all the time. I (8. complain) about the boss all
the time, but Mary (9. think) the boss is a nice person.
When I (10. finish) work, I like to go out with my
friends, but Elizabeth (11. study) at night school.
The boss (12. think) Elizabeth is wonderful, but she
(13. drive) me crazy!
10 Activity
Fill in the blanks with the correct form of words given

in parentheses.
1. I __ (not work) eight hours a day.
2. Who __ you __ (talk) to?
3. I __ (not work) very well.
4. What will you do if I __ (come) late?
5. My best friend __ (like) coffee for breakfast.
6. What __ Pam usually __(have) for dinner?
7. What __ Susana __ (do) ? She’s a student.
8. My family __ (go) to church once a week.
9. My wife and I __ (not go) to the beach in the winter. Lesson core
10. The children __ (leave) at 8:30 every morning of
the week. Conociste las ocupaciones más comunes en Inglés
11. In the north, the seasons __ (change) four times a year. las cuales utilizaste para describir o expresar lo
que tus familiares, amigos o conocidos hacen para
12. My parents __ (come) to visit once or twice a year. ganarse la vida en forma honrada. Leíste acerca de
13. The weather __ (get) very cold in El Pital in the winter. las responsabilidades de varias ocupaciones en El
14. I __ (not know) how to fill out an application form. Salvador. Además, tuviste acceso a ver y conocer
como se llena una solicitud de empleo la cual te
servirá como base o ejemplo práctico para terminar
tu primer proyecto de este grado. Finalmente,
estudiaste y practicaste como hacer oraciones
negativas, afirmativas e interrogativas en tiempo
presente con el auxiliar “Do/Does”.

UNIT 2
Self evaluation
1 Which are occupations?

a) manager 3 Which are two sections of a job
application form?
a) Education
b) application form
b) Your previous jobs
c) mechanic
c) Employment history
d) fill out
d) Languages you know
2 Which is a negative sentence?

a) He plays soccer. 4 Which of the following is an information
question using the auxiliary “do”?
b) We don’t speak Spanish. a) What is that?
c) I work in an office. b) Where do you work?
d) She studies English. c) What languages can you speak?
d) Where is the application form?
4. b 3. a, c 2. b 1. a, c Answers:
FORMS IN ENGLISH
Before looking for a job, it is necessary to know

how to fill out a job application form in English.
You should know about the kind of information
to include in each section of the application and
what kind of data you should not include. It is a
good idea to include that you can speak English
and have some computer skills in order to have a
better chance of getting the job. By properly filling
out an application form in English, you will have
more opportunities for a better job and salary.

Unit Two Lesson 5
How old are you?
Getting started!
C
¿ ómo se pregunta por las edades de las personas
en Inglés?
¿Cómo se responde las edades de las personas
en Inglés?
¿Cómo dicen los números del 100 al 200 en Inglés?
¿Cómo se utiliza la forma del pasado del verbo ser o
estar en Inglés?
I can exchange information about myself and others using accurate I can ask for and tell family members’ ages.
vocabulary and pronunciation.
Which of the following is the correct spelling of the

number “115”? Activity 1
1. one hundred fifty 3. one hundred five
2. one hundred fifteen 4. one hundred fifty- five Choose the letter that best answers the questions based on the
previous conversation.
1. When did El Salvador gain its independence?
Conversation and more A. More than 15 years ago.
B. More than 187 years ago.
and identify the commands. Look up any new words in 2. How old is Ricardo?
a dictionary. A. He is 22 years old.
B. He is 25 years old.
A: Hey, Ricardo. Do you know when El Salvador
gained its independence? 3. How old is Marcos?
B: Yes, it was more than 187 years ago. A. He is 25 years old.
A: And do you know when El Salvador signed the B. He is 22 years old.
Peace Accords?
B: No, I don’t. When was that?
A: It was more than 15 years ago.
B: By the way, how old are you, Marcos?
A: I am 25 years old. What about you?
B: I’m 22 years old. Why do you ask questions about
the past?
A: Because I’m interested in Salvadoran history.
Glossary: Was: the past tense of “is”.

Know: to be familiar with something. Ago: before or previously.
Independence: freedom or liberty.

UNIT 2

The table below includes a list of cardinal numbers from
Activity 3
100 to 200. These numbers are used to express years, age,
amounts of money, and phone numbers among other Listen carefully and repeat the following pairs of numbers.
things. Pay attention to their pronunciation and spelling.
one hundred thirteen one hundred thirty
Listen to and repeat each number out loud.
one hundred fourteen one hundred forty
100 one hundred 110 one hundred ten one hundred fifteen one hundred fifty
101 one hundred one 120 one hundred twenty one hundred sixteen one hundred sixty
102 one hundred two 130 one hundred thirty one hundred seventeen one hundred seventy
one hundred one hundred eighteen one hundred eighty
103 three 140 one hundred forty
one hundred nineteen one hundred ninety
104 one hundred four 150 one hundred fifty
105 one hundred five 160 one hundred sixty
106 one hundred six
one hundred
170 seventy Activity 4
one hundred Write the following numbers in words.
107 seven 180 one hundred eighty
one hundred 1. 121
108 eight 190 one hundred ninety
2. 135
one hundred 3. 146
109 nine 200 two hundred
4. 189
5. 194
2 Activity 6. 199
7. 177
Listen carefully to the following cardinal numbers and

choose the one you hear.
1. 103 / 100
2. 115 / 150
3. 123 / 120
4. 145 / 160
5. 189 / 199
6. 220 / 200
What for?
Cardinal numbers are used to write check quantities and numbers such as: the bank account
number, the check number, the dollar amount in words, and numbers and dates. Even if you
want to cash a check, you have to write your ID number on the back of the check.

UNIT 2
Time to read
Read the following timeline from a BBC news report.
Look up any new words in a dictionary.
El Salvador: A chronology of key events

1524 - Spanish adventurer Pedro de Alvarado
conquers El Salvador.
1540 - Indigenous resistance finally crushed and El
Salvador becomes a Spanish colony.
1821 - El Salvador gains independence from Spain.
Conflict over the territory’s incorporation
into the Mexican Empire under Creole
General Agustin de Iturbide.
1823 - El Salvador becomes part of the United
Provinces of Central America, which also
includes Costa Rica, Guatemala, Honduras
and Nicaragua.
Independence
1840 - El Salvador becomes fully independent
following the dissolution of the United
Provinces of Central America.
Activity 5
1859-63 - President Gerardo Barrios introduces
coffee growing. Choose the letter that best answers the questions according to
the previous timeline.
Special events and natural disasters 1. When did Pedro de Alvarado conquer El Salvador?
1970 - National soccer team classifies and A. more than 200 hundred years ago
participates in the FIFA World Cup for the
first time. B. less than 200 hundred years ago
1982 - National soccer team qualifies and classifies
for the FIFA World Cup. 2. When did El Salvador gain its independence?
1998 - Hurricane Mitch strikes Honduras,
Nicaragua and El Salvador. Many houses are A. more than 187 years ago
destroyed. B. less than 187 years ago
2001 - In January and February two massive
earthquakes kill 1,200 people and render
another one million homeless. 3. When was coffee growing introduced?
2001 - The U.S. dollar currency is introduced to El A. more than 40 years ago
Salvador and all Salvadorans begin using B. less than 40 years ago
dollars all over the country.
2003 - In December El Salvador - along with
Honduras, Nicaragua, Guatemala - agrees 4. When did the Salvadoran national soccer team
on a free-trade agreement with the U.S. It qualify to play in the World Cup for the first time?
is called the Central American Free Trade A. more than 50 years ago
Agreement (or TLC in Spanish).
The government ratifies the pact in B. less than 50 years ago
December 2004.
2005 - In October thousands flee as the Ilamatepec
Volcano, also known as the Santa Ana 5. When did Hurricane Mitch strike El Salvador?
Volcano, erupts. Days later scores of people A. more than 30 years ago
are killed as Tropical Storm Stan sweeps B. less than 30 years ago
through El Salvador.

UNIT 2

Activity 6
Choose the letter that best answers the questions based on the
A: Hi. I don’t think we’ve met. My name’s Rolando. previous conversation.
B: Hi, Rolando. Nice to meet you. My name is Juana,
1. What is the woman’s name?
but everybody calls me Jenny.
A: Nice to meet you, Jenny. So, where are you from? A. Julia
B: Well, originally I’m from El Salvador, but my B. Juana
family moved to Canada when I was about eight C. Josefa
years old. My parents now live in Guatemala.
That’s where they first met. How about
you, Rolando? 2. Where is the woman from originally?
A: I am from Chinameca, San Miguel. My family A. El Salvador
lived there until I was twelve. But we moved a lot B. the United States
because my father worked for an international
construction company. C. Guatemala
B: Oh yeah? Where are some of the places you lived?
A: Mostly we lived in South America. We spent a 3. About how old was the man when he moved away
total of ten years in Chile, Argentina, and Brazil. from San Miguel?
Three years ago we returned to El Salvador.
B: Wow! You know many places. What do you do A. 7 years old
now, Rolando? B. 10 years old
A: I’m a student at the national university. C. 12 years old
B: Oh really? What do you study?
A: Modern languages. How about you, Jenny? What
do you do? 4. What is the man studying?
B: Well, I work as a secretary for World Computers in A. Mathematics
downtown San Salvador. B. Languages
A: No kidding! My younger brother works there, too.
C. History
5. What is the woman’s job?

A. Accountant
B. Secretary
C. Receptionist
Hands on! 1J
The final part of the application form usually asks

for personal references. Be prepared to write the
name, relationship, address, and phone number
of three people that know you well and can
recommend you for the job.
Glossary: Spent: the past tense of “spend”.

Moved: the past tense of “move” which means a change of residence. So far: up to now.
Met: the past tense of “meet”.

UNIT 2

You can use cardinal numbers when writing personal checks. To write or cash a check, you have to be cautious and
carefully observe that all the information is filled out correctly.
Study the following sample check and learn what each line of the check is used for by reading the instructions below.
John Smith A E 0125-00158-152-85 0131

Main Street, Apt 154
Los Angeles, California 102-125 F
DATE: __________
J
B
Pay to the order of: _______________ ___________________ $ _________ K
________________________________________________ DOLLARS G
Bank Of The World BANK OF THE WORLD BANK OF THE WORLD
192-1 Main Street
C BANK OF THE WORLD BANK OF THE WORLD
Los Angeles, Californ BANK OF THE WORLD BANK OF THE WORLD
For ___________ D _______________ _________ H
_______________
102-153-149 0125-193 123-198 188 I
Line A shows the account holder’s name. On this sample check, John Smith is the account holder or owner.
is used for the payee's name. If you are writing a check to the electric company, then the electric
Line B company is the payee.
shows the name of the bank. On this sample check, the bank’s name is Bank of the World, located in
Line C Los Angeles, California.
Line D is the memo line. On this line, a person can write a note or an account number of a bill to be paid.
Line E is the international bank number. This number is written on deposit slips.
is used for the date of the check. It’s important to write the date when writing a check: December
Line F 19, 2010.
is for writing the dollar amount in words. For example, “One hundred ninety-five dollars and
Line G 89/100.”
Line H is for the signature of the account holder. On this sample check, only John Smith may sign the check.
Line I is the bank account number. On this sample check, the account number is 123-198-188.
Line J is the check number. On this sample check, the check number is 0131.
Line K is for writing the dollar amount in numbers. For example, “$195.89”
7 Activity
Now complete the sample check by the following the above instructions carefully or by providing your own information.

UNIT 2
Language in use
Past tense forms of the verb “be”
1. To make affirmative and negative statements, study the following table:
Subject pronouns “Be” Verb in an affirmative sentence Verb in a negative sentence
I was I was an engineer. I wasn’t an engineer.
he was He was a manager. He wasn’t a manager.
it was It was a new PC. It wasn’t a new PC.
we were We were colleagues. We weren’t colleagues.
they were They were supervisors. They weren’t supervisors.
2. To make and answer Yes/No questions, study the following table:
Verb in a Yes/No question Affirmative answer Negative answer
Was I an engineer? Yes, you were. No, you weren´t.
Were you a technician? Yes, I was. No, I was not.
Was she a secretary? Yes, she was. No, she was not.
Were we colleagues? Yes, we were. No we were not.
Were they supervisors? Yes, they were. No, they weren´t.
3. To make and answer Wh- word questions, study the following table:
Question word “Be” Subject Complement Possible answers
When were you born? I was born in December.
Where were they yesterday? They were at work.
Why was she in the office? Because she was working.
What was it? It was the email.
Who was with you? My boss was with me.
8 Activity
Read the statements and choose the correct form of the verb “be”.
1. She is thirty now, so last year she __ twenty-nine. 5. I didn’t buy those tennis shoes because they __
A. was too expensive.
B. were A. was
B. were
2. __ it a good action movie?
6. When I __ a child, we lived in Costa Rica.
A. was
A. was
B. were B. were
3. I got married when I __ thirty-two. 7. Where __ you yesterday afternoon?

A. Was A. was
B. Were B. were
4. It was a great day, but we __ so tired. 8. Why __ he so angry?

A. was A. was
B. were B. were

UNIT 2
Match the questions to the corresponding answers.
Listen carefully to the following questions, and then
Were you at No, it wasn’t. The answer them with your own information.
1 home yesterday? A music was pretty bad.
Was Ryan in class Yes, she was. We were 1. What number is between one hundred sixteen and
2 yesterday? B both there. one hundred eighteen?
Was the concert Yes, it was. Matt 2. Where were you born?
3 good? C Damon is a great actor. 3. What number is before two hundred?
Was the movie No, I wasn’t. I was at 4. Who was El Salvador’s president 10 years ago?
4 interesting? D a concert. 5. Were you a good student in the 6th grade?
Was Susan at the No, he wasn’t. He 6. Where was your mother born?
5 library? E was sick.
7. Which number is after one hundred twenty-nine?
8. Who was in your house last night?
9. How much is seventy dollars plus (+)
eighty -five dollars?
10. How old is your grandmother?
11. How many years ago did El Salvador gain
its independence?
12. Was your grandfather born one hundred one years ago?
Lesson core
Conociste como se escriben y pronuncian los

10 Activity números ordinales del cien al doscientos. Asimismo,
preguntaste la edad de las demás personas que te
rodean y dijiste cual era tu edad y de tus familiares
Match the numbers to their written form. en Inglés. Además, viste como se llena una solicitud
1 112 A one hundred and twelve de trabajo o empleo en Inglés, así como llenar o
leer un cheque en forma correcta. Finalmente
2 115 B one hundred and seventeen tuviste la oportunidad de conocer y practicar como
3 113 C one hundred and fourteen se utiliza la forma del pasado del verbo ¨be¨ en
4 117 D one hundred and sixteen oraciones afirmativas, negativas e interrogativas
para preguntar y responder acerca de aspectos del
5 119 E one hundred and thirteen pasado relacionados al país y de tu vida.
6 116 F one hundred and eleven
7 111 G one hundred and fifteen
8 118 H one hundred and eighteen
9 114 I one hundred and nineteen

UNIT 2
Self evaluation
1 Which is the correct spelling for the

number 160? 3 Which questions are used to ask
someone’s age?
a) one hundred sixteen a) How are you?
b) one hundred sixty- one b) How old are you?
c) one hundred sixty c) Where were you born?
d) one hundred and sixteen d) When were you born?
2 Which of the following is a negative

statement in the past tense? 4 Which of the following is a Yes/No
question in the past tense?
a) I was in the office. a) Are you in your office?
b) Was she in her office this morning? b) Where were you?
c) They weren’t in the meeting. c) Are you the new secretary?
d) We aren’t workmates. d) Was she your best friend?
4. d 3.b, d 2. c 1. c Answers:
INTERNATIONAL COMPANIES
Keep in mind that if you want to work for an

international company, either inside or outside
of El Salvador, you will need to follow several
steps in applying for a job. You will need to
fill out a job application form (in Spanish or
English), arrange a job interview, and hand in
your resume. This is the standard set of rules
for applying for a job in any country in the world.
Once you master these skills, you can look for
work anywhere!

Answer Key
Lesson 1 Activity 6: 1.A 2.B 3.A

Activity 1: 1. They’re Ok 2. La Union 3. not bad Activity 7: 1.B 2.B
4. two brothers and three sisters Activity 8: 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. B 7. B
Activity 2: 1. H 2. G 3. F 4. E 5. D 6. C 7. B 8. A Activity 9: 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. B 6. B 7. B
Activity 3: 1. sons 2. brother 3. daughter-in-law Activity 10: 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. B
4. wife 5. granddaughter 6. grandson Activity 11: Answers may vary.
Activity 4: 1. her husband 2. his mother
3. her grandmother 4. her niece
5. his uncle 6. Juan’s father-in-law
Activity 5: 2. daughter 3. father-in-law 4. aunt
5. nephew 6. grandmother 7. brother Lesson 3
8. granddaughter 9. brother in-law
Activity 1: Conversation 1: Country- Canada /
Activity 6: 1. daughter 2. son 3. brother Nationality-Canadian, Chinese
4. grandchildren 5. father 6. mother
Conversation 2: Country- France
Activity 7: 1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False
Activity 2: 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. B
Activity 8: 1. A 2. B
Activity 3: 1. False 2. False 3. True 4. True
Activity 9: 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. A 7. B 5. False 6. False
Activity 10: 1. friend’s 2.girls’ 3.John’s 4. today’s Activity 4: 1. B. 2. B 3. C 4. A
5. children’s 6. boss’s 7. father’s
8. mother’s 9. friends’
Activity 6: 1. the United states of America
Activity 11: 1. father 2. uncle 3. cousins 4. aunt
2. Australia 3. Canada 4. yes
5. grandmother 6. grandchildren
7. nephew Activity 7: 1. Salvadoran 2 . in El Salvador
Activity 12: 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. C 6. A 7. A 8. B Activity 8: 1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. B
9. C 10. A Activity 9: 1. the USA 2. Argentina 3. Brazil
4. Brazil 5. the USA
Activity 10: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. B
9. A
Lesson 2
Activity 3: 1. False 2. False 3. False 4. False
5. True 6. False 7. True 8. False 9. False
Activity 4: 1. is 2. has 3. is 4. is 5. is 6. has

Answer Key
Lesson 4
Lesson 5
Activity 1: 1. certified accountant
2. Human Resource Manager Activity 1: 1. B 2. A 3. A
3. Global Account Company
Activity 2: 1. 100 2. 115 3. 120 4. 165 5. 189
Activity 2: 1. H 2. G 3. F 4. E 5. D 6. C 7. B 8. A 6. 200
Activity 3: 1. False 2. False 3. False 4. True 5. True Activity 3: Listening activity.
Activity 4: 1. Personal Information 2. Position Activity 4: 1. one hundred twenty-one 2. one
3. Education 4. Employment History hundred thirty-five 3. one hundred
5. References forty-six 4. one hundred eighty-nine
Activity 5: 1. A 2. A 5. one hundred ninety-four 6. one
hundred ninety-nine 7. one hundred
Activity 6: 1. generally yes 2. spelling mistakes
seventy-seven
Activity 7: 1. Accountant Assistant 2. at Global
Account 3. Los Heroes Boulevard
Activity 5: 1. A 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. B
Number 2345, San Salvador, Activity 6: 1. B 2. A 3. C 4.B 5. B
El Salvador Activity 7: Answers may vary.
Activity 8: 1. Does he play an a soccer team? 2. Do Activity 8: 1.A 2. A 3.A 4.B 5.B 6.A 7.B 8.A
we work in a hospital? 3. Do they live
in Canada? 4. Does he teach English? Activity 9: 1. D 2. E 3. A 4. C 5. B
5. Does she drink coffee every day? Activity 10: 1. A 2. G 3. E 4. B 5. I 6. D 7. F 8. H
6. Do you study in your house? 7. Does 9. C
it cost $50.00? Activity 11: Answers may vary.
Activity 9: 1. work 2. likes 3. don’t like 4. washes
5. clean 6. doesn’t smile 7. laugh
8. complain 9. thinks 10. finish
11. studies 12. thinks 13. drives
Activity 10: 1. don’t work 2. do you talk 3. don’t
work 4. come 5.likes 6. does Pam
usually have 7. does Susana do 8. goes
9. don’t go 10. leave11. change
12. come 13. gets 14. don’t know

Hands on!
“Filling out a job application form” part 2
Purpose
With this project you will be able to improve your English skills on how to fill out specific sections of a
common job application form such as personal information and employment history.
Theory and practice

The different phases of the unit 1 and 2 project (from Hands on!1F to Hands on!1I) gave you ideas on how to
understand technical concepts which are included in any application form.
With these different project phases you should have kept track of key elements and concepts to have a mental
picture of what application sections could look like.
Development
You should have noticed that when answering the content from different activities, you were gaining the basic
knowledge to fill out the personal information section of any form.
Remember to take a look again at the activities which gave you some good practice about how to fill out specific
application form sections.
The activities provided you with some good background, and with this you will be able to complete your
project efficiently.
Wrap up
To complete the project, fill out the sections of the job application form which you printed off at the beginning
of unit 1. Save this application form, complete with your information, as it will help you on future projects.

Resources
For use of a bilingual dictionary:
For more about family:

http://www.ego4u.com/en/cram-up/vocabulary/family
For more on family trees:

http://www.ancestry.com/
For physical description and personality:

http://www.personalitypage.com/high-level.html
http://www.miguelmllop.com/practice/puzzles/physicaldescription.htm
For practicing countries, nationalities, and languages:

http://www.englishclub.com/vocabulary/world-countries-nationality.htm
http://www.audioenglish.net/english-learning/basic_countries_nationalities_pronunciation1.htm
For jobs and occupations:

http://www.eslflashcards.com/preview.php?id=46
http://www.zoomjobs.com/site.pages/pro-occupations.html
For practicing cardinal numbers:

http://www.studyenglishtoday.net/cardinal-numbers.html
For the full BBC news report:

http://news.bbc.co.uk/go/pr/fr/-/2/hi/americas/country_profiles/1220818.stm
For more information contained in the “Language in use” sections of each lesson,
take a look at the following English grammar books:

ENGLISH
Unit 3
OUR SUPPLIES
Objectives:
Understand both oral and written language related to prices,
clothing, furniture, food and drinks in order to learn how to ask for
and purchase goods.
Produce oral and written language related to prices, clothing,
furniture, food and drinks in order to establish communication
when purchasing goods.
Get acquainted with the role of customer service through authentic
material in order to become aware of consumer’s rights.
UNIT 3
Unit 3
Our
supplies
Listening Grammar
Speaking Vocabulary
Writing

Clothing and Seasons and Foods and drinks Money Furniture and
accessories, weather, review of denominations prices up to
numbers from 200 colors $500.00
to 1000
Unit guidelines
In this unit you will learn how to express information about the weather conditions of El Salvador and other countries
around the world. You will also practice colors as well as the most common clothes and accessories used in different
seasons or weather. You’ll talk about different kinds of food and drinks, as well as how to prepare them. Finally, you’ll
learn how to ask for and give prices using amounts of money up to five hundred dollars. As an independent learner, it
is recommended that you keep track of your own learning progress.
In this unit you will work on a project called “My monthly budget”. You will include all of the monthly expenses that
you or your family has , such as clothing, food, education, gas, electricity, water, and telephone bills. Also, you will
include a brief description of each one of these expenses. However, you will focus more on the types of incomes and
expenses. At the end of the unit, you will be able to make a family budget and a pie chart to try to balance your family’s
expenses and incomes. This project is going to be beneficial to you because you will be able to use your money
more wisely.

Unit Three Lesson 1
Getting started!
May I help you?
C
¿ ómo se dicen las diferentes prendas de vestir
en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen los diferentes accesorios en inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen los números entre doscientos a un mil
en Inglés?
¿Qué partes constituyen un presupuesto mensual
familiar en Inglés?
I can discriminate numbers from 200 to 1000 from diverse I can politely compliment others for their taste in clothes.
recorded material. I can identify and list different clothing items and
I can scan words related to clothing from a short text. accessories correctly.
Which of the following items are names of clothes?

1. blouse 2. many 3. jeans 4. more 5.T-shirt 6.store 7.skirt
8.sweater Activity 1
Conversation and more previous conversation.
Listen to and read the following conversation and 1. What is the man looking for?
identify the clothes that are mentioned. Look up any new 2. What size does he wear in jeans?
words in a dictionary. 3. What colors does he want?
A: Hello. May I help you?

B: Hello. I am looking for a pair of jeans.
A: What size do you wear in jeans?
B: I think I wear a size 36. Don’t forget!
A: Okay. What color?
B: Do you have them in light brown or khaki?
Shopping for new clothes and the latest fashions is
A: Yes, we do. Please, wait a minute. I’ll bring them.
often important to people because they want to look
B: No problem. Take your time. nice. A new trend is that people shop for clothes and
A: Here they are. You can try them on over there. other items online from the comfort of their
B: Thank you very much. I’ll put them on right now. own homes.
Glossary: Trend: something new and popular.

Try on: to put something on to check the size.
Put on: to dress or wear clothes.

UNIT 3

Study the following list of common clothes and accessories that Salvadorans often wear. Listen to and repeat each word
out loud.
jeans pants
blouse shirt polo shirt
earrings shoes wallet socks sweater
belt sandals watch purse

jacket
2 Activity
Match the clothes or accessories on the left to the descriptions on the right.
Clothes or Descriptions
accessories
1 suit A We wear them to keep our hands warm.
2 skirt B We wear it to keep our heads warm.
3 shirt C We wrap it around our necks in winter.
4 coat D “Levis” and “Wranglers” are __.
5 socks E Men usually wear one around their necks with a suit.
6 tie F We wear them on our feet with shoes.
7 jeans G We wear it on top of our clothes to keep us warm.
8 scarf H It has buttons up the front, a collar, sleeves and is often white.
It goes from the waist down, is most often worn by women, and can
9 hat I be mini, knee or ankle length.
10 gloves J Trousers or a skirt with a matching jacket is called a __.

UNIT 3
Shopping
Time To read
Listen to and read the following passages. Look up aany If you want to go shopping, there are a number of things
new words in a dictionary. you should consider. If you would like to find a (1) b__,
you should make sure to go to a (2) s__. The only
problem with a sale is that it is sometimes hard to
(3) e__ something after you buy it. Many stores also
refuse to give a (4) r__ on anything after you buy it. If
you are looking for clothes, make sure to (5) t__ and
check the (6) s__ to make sure that it is a good (7) f__.
Another good idea is to look at the (8) t__ and (9) l__
to read instructions for washing. It’s always a good idea to
also ask the (10) s__ for (11) a__. Finally, when you
go to the (12) c__, you can usually pay by (13) cr__ or
(14) c__ if you don’t have the (15) ca__. Never forget
to take the (16) r__ !
Dressing up
Activity 4
I usually try to dress for the occasion. If I go to visit Fill in the blanks to the previous passage with the words from
friends, I generally dress casually. I wear jeans and a polo the box. The first letter (s)of each word is given.
shirt. In the case of a date with my girlfriend, I usually
wear a nice polo shirt but nothing too formal. In the past
I made it a habit to dress up for work with a suit and a tie
because it was important to give a good impression, but tag cashier try them on fit
more people are dressing less formal in the workplace, label receipt credit card advice
which is more acceptable now. When I exercise,
I generally wear shorts and a T-shirt, and I put on exchange bargain sales clerk check
comfortable running shoes. Overall, I think new fashions cash refund size sale
are replacing traditional ones, but I also think we should
also try to preserve typical traditional clothing. It’s a part
of our Salvadoran culture and heritage.
3 Activity
What for?
Decide whether the following statements are true or false.
If you want to return an item to a store, be sure
1. The person in this passage is a man. to have your receipt. Depending on the store’s
2. On a date this person wears a formal suit. return policy, you might be refunded for the full
price or you might receive store credit if you take
3. In the present he wears a suit and a tie for work. the receipt along.
4. He wears shorts and running shoes to exercise.
5. The man always tries to dress for the occasion.
6. The person thinks new fashions are replacing
old ones.
Glossary: Made: the past tense of “make” which means to construct or create something.
Put on: wear or dress up. Habit: doing something over and over again.
Casually: not formal. Overall: in general.
Date: a meeting or reunion. Heritage: legacy or customs.

UNIT 3

Listen to and read the following conversation between
Activity 5
a customer and a store clerk carefully. Look up any new
words in a dictionary. Choose the letter that best answers each question or statement.
1. What is the name of the store?
A. Samba’s
B. Chamba’s
C. Shamba’s
2. How many racks of clothes are on sale?

A. one
B. two
C. three
A: Hi. Welcome to Chamba’s Clothing Store. May I 3. When the customer sees the sweater, she likes it.
help you? But she would prefer __.
B: Yes, please. Aren’t you having a sale right now?
A: Everything on these two racks over here is on sale. A. a smaller size
B: Thanks. Oh! This sweater is nice. But it looks a B. a larger size
little big. Do you have this in a smaller size? C. a green one
A: I think so. Let me look. Oh, here’s one. Would you
like to try it on in the dressing room?
B: Sure. Thanks. 4. A dressing room is a place where you __.
A: How does it fit? A. buy clothes
B: Not too bad. I think I’ll take it.
B. make clothes
A: Great. How would you like to pay for it? Cash,
check or credit card? C. try on clothes
B: Well, I don’t have my credit card now, so I think I’ll
pay with a check. 5. The customer says she “will take it.” It means
A: Okay, with tax it comes to $11.13. she will __.
B: Who should I make the check out to?
A: Chamba’s Clothing Store.
A. buy nothing
B: Here you are. B. try on the sweater
A: Can I see your I.D. too, please? C. buy the sweater
B: Sure, here is my driver’s license.
A: Thanks. Here you go. Enjoy your new sweater.
And have a nice day. 6. Which item is not an I.D.?
B: Thanks. You too. A. a driver’s license
B. a picture
C. a passport
Hands on! 3A
For the first part of your project, keep track of the

clothing and accessories your family buys and
how much money they spend purchasing these
items in one month.
Glossary: Dressing room: a room where you can put on or try on the new clothes.
Sale: items in a store are reduced in price. Tax: the IVA that is taken from every trade or business transaction.
Racks: stands or shelves.

UNIT 3

Look at the following table of cardinal numbers from 200
Activity 6
to 1000. Listen to and repeat each number out loud.
Write the answers in words to the following
200 two hundred 210 two hundred ten mathematical exercises.
201 two hundred one 300 three hundred Examples: minus (-), plus (+)
202 two hundred two 400 four hundred
Answers: 600 + 300 = nine hundred
203 two hundred three 500 five hundred
885 – 285 = six hundred
204 two hundred four 600 six hundred
1. 1000 – 250 = 2. 550 + 399 =
205 two hundred five 700 seven hundred
3. 978 – 305 = 4. 561 + 427 =
206 two hundred six 800 eight hundred
207 two hundred seven 900 nine hundred
208 two hundred eight one thousand/
209 two hundred nine
1000 a thousand
Activity 7
Hundreds and tens are usually separated by ‘and’ but in Answer the following questions according to the
American English ‘and’ is not necessary. previous conversation.
Examples: 1. How many pairs of jeans are there?

110: one hundred and ten or one hundred ten 2. How many pairs of blue jeans are there?
999: nine hundred and ninety-nine or nine hundred 3. How many blouses are there?
ninety-nine
4. How many small blouses are there?
5. How many T-shirts are there?

Listen to and read the following conversation that takes
place in a clothing warehouse carefully. Look up any new
A: Hey! How many pairs of blue jeans are there for
the Christmas season?
B: Let me look at the inventory. According to this
report we have more than 450 pairs of jeans in
different colors: 250 pairs of blue jeans and 200
pairs of green jeans; 950 blouses in different sizes:
350 in small, 400 in medium and 200 in large.
Finally, we have 1000 T-shirts: 550 in small, 300 in
medium and 250 in large.
A: Do we have jeans for women?
B: None at all.
A: Then we can ask for 750 pairs of jeans in different
colors and sizes for women.
B: Right!
A: We have many other accessories in stock. So we
don’t need to order any more of those.
B: That’s right. Let’s get to work!

UNIT 3
Language in use
Asking for clothing sizes
The sizing of clothes and shoes varies between Britain, the U.S.A. and Europe. The charts below show the differences
and should help you find the right size.
Women’s suits and dresses: T-shirt sizes use the following titles
Britain 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 and abbreviations:
U.S.A. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 S M L XL
Europe 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 small medium large extra large
Women’s shoes: Men’s shoes:

Britain 4 41/2 5 51/2 6 61/2 7 Britain 7 71/2 8 81/2 9 91/2 10
U.S.A. 51/2 6 61/2 7 71/2 8 81/2 U.S.A. 71/2 8 81/2 9 91/2 10 101/2
Europe 361/2 37 371/2 38 381/2 39 391/2 Europe 41 411/2 42 421/2 43 431/2 44
Men’s shirts: Men’s shirts:

Britain 14 15 16 161/2 17 171/2 10 Britain 14 15 16 161/2 17 171/2 10
U.S.A. 14 15 16 161/2 17 171/2 101/2 U.S.A. 14 15 16 161/2 17 171/2 101/2
Europe 35 38 41 42-43 44 45 44 Europe 35 38 41 42-43 44 45 44
To ask for the size of different clothes you can use the following question forms:
Questions Possible answers
What size does this shirt come in? It comes in small, medium, and large.
What size are your shoes? I wear size 30.
What size is it? It is a small/medium/large.
Is it a small, medium, large or extra large? It is a small/ medium/ large.
What is John’s shirt size? John’s shirt size is extra large.
What size do you wear? I wear size 9 shoes.
What size would you like to try on? I would like to try a medium on.
What size are you looking for? I am looking for a size 16.
What size clothes/shoes do you wear? I think about a size 10.
8 Activity

1. What size shoes do you wear?
2. What’s your T-shirt size?
3. What size do you wear in jeans?
4. What size shirt do you wear?
5. What size does your mother or father wear?

UNIT 3
Complete the following sentences by filling in the blanks
with the words given below. Choose the letter that best answers each idiom.
swimming 1. That little boy has ants in his pants. He __.

jeans boots gloves belt A. washed his clothes
suit
pants pajamas sweater hat tie B. plays in the dirt
C. cannot sit still
1. You might want to wear a __ to the party tonight.
It’s supposed to be a formal occasion.
2. Paco’s last comment was a hit below the
2. Put on a __. It’ll keep your head cooler in the belt. It __.
hot sun. A. was unfair and cowardly
3. I think we need to make him wear a __. His pants B. was unfashionable
keep falling down.
C. was cheerful and fair
4. You ought to bring a __ to the beach in case you
want to get in the water.
5. Try on this __. It’ll keep you warm during the
cool evenings.
6. Hey… Get out of bed and change out of your __.
You’ll be late for school if you don’t hurry!
7. Put out your __ to wash. I think they got dirty when
you were on your knees working in the garden.
8. My daughter forgot to wear her __ when she went
out to play in the snow, and her hands were really
cold when she came back inside.
9. When you go hiking, you should wear some good,
durable __ to protect your feet from sharp rocks.
10. Everyone is going casual, so I’m just going to wear
__ and button-up shirt.
Lesson core
Conociste los accesorios y prendas de vestir más usados y comunes de la

mayoría de los salvadoreños y las salvadoreñas. Además, practicaste cómo se
dicen y se escriben en inglés. También, tuviste acceso a preguntar y responder
la talla de diferentes prendas tales como zapatos, pantalones, camisas y
blusas. Practicaste como se pronuncian, se escriben y se utilizan los números
cardinales desde el 200 hasta el 1000. Finalmente, leíste acerca temas
relacionados a las prendas de vestir y los accesorios.

UNIT 3
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following items is not an

example of an accessory? 3 Which is the correct spelling for the
number 975?
a) watch a) nine hundred and seventeen
b) umbrella b) nine hundred and fifty-seven
c) necklace c) nine hundred and seventy-five
d) pants d) nine hundred and sixty-five
2 Which of the following items is not an

example of a piece of clothing? 4 Which questions are used to ask for
clothing sizes?
a) jeans a) What color is the blouse?
b) shorts b) What size do you wear?
c) blouse c) What is your shirt size?
d) glasses d) What size are you looking for?
4. b, c, d 3. c 2. d 1. b, d Answers:
FASHION TRENDS
What does the word “trendy” mean in relation to

fashion? Simply answered, “trendy” means being
up to date with the latest clothes, accessories
and jewelry that you choose to wear. In a
nutshell, if you are dressed from head to toe
in the newest designs from Paris, New York or
London and have all of the right pieces of jewelry
to go with them, you may be referred to by an
onlooker as being trendy.

Unit Three Lesson 2
What is the weather like?
Getting started!
¿Cómo se dicen las diferentes estaciones del año?
¿Cuáles son las diferentes condiciones tiempo o clima?
¿Qué tipo de ropa utilizas en cada temporada del año?
¿Qué actividades puedes realizar en las diferentes
estaciones del año?
I can appropriately list the most commonly used clothing items and I can discriminate colors of the most commonly used clothing items,
accessories depending on the weather. accessories and furniture.
Which of the following words describe the weather?

1. hot 2. umbrella 3. cold 4. sweater 5. sunny 6. raincoat 7. cloudy
A: Oh! I’m really sorry to hear that. Don’t worry. We

Conversation and more can get together at your house.
B: Really! Thanks a lot. I’ll prepare the snacks.
Listen to and read the following conversations and A: Then, I’ll call our friends and ask them to meet at
identify the words used to describe the weather. Look up your house.
Conversation 1
A: Hey! What is the weather like today?
B: It’s cloudy and cold.
Activity 1
A: Is it going to rain?
B: Maybe. Just take a look at the shapes and forms of Answer the following question about the previous
the clouds. conversations. What is the weather like?
A: What? What are you talking about?
B: Sorry! I just read the weather report this morning.
A: Oh, man! Do you really believe in that stuff?
Conversation 2
A: Hello, Andrea. How are you?
B: I am a little sad.
A: Why?
B: Because it’s raining and cold outside and today is
my birthday.

UNIT 3

In the North Temperate Zone, four seasons (spring, summer, autumn, and winter) are generally recognized. Some parts of
the world have three seasons (the dry, the rainy, and the cold) and other parts have only two (the dry and the rainy).
Weather is the condition of the atmosphere at a given time that includes temperature, precipitation, humidity, pressure
and winds.
spring summer autumn/fall winter

Study the list of the common weather conditions. Listen to and repeat each weather condition out loud.
It’s hot. It’s cold. It’s rainy. It’s sunny. It’s cloudy.
It’s windy. It’s snowy. It’s foggy. It’s stormy.
2 Activity
Don’t forget!
Match the seasons with the weather conditions.
1. spring A cold and snowy The Fahrenheit scale is used to calculate temperatures
in the United States, and in most other countries Celsius
2. summer B warm and wet is used instead. The formula to convert Celsius to
3. fall C cool and windy Fahrenheit is… Tf = (9/5)*Tc+32; Tc = temperature in
degrees Celsius, Tf = temperature in degrees Fahrenheit.
4. winter D hot and sunny

UNIT 3
Time to read
Listen to and read the following article about a weather
Activity 3
forecast carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary. Choose the letter that best answers each question.
1. What is Friday’s weather like?
A. humid and rainy
B. warm and dry
C. hot and partly cloudy
2. What is the high temperature for Friday in

San Salvador?
A. 25 degrees
B. 28 degrees
C. 30 degrees
3. What is Saturday evening’s weather forecast for

San Salvador?
A. snowy and rainy
B. sunny and dry
For those of you who will leave the house today, it will be
a clear day and warm for most of the department of San C. some rain in parts of El Salvador
Salvador with a low temperature of 24 degrees. The city
of San Salvador will have a high for the day of 30 degrees. 4. At about what time should skies clear
And that’s hot! I’m happy to work indoors today! on Sunday?
For those of you planning outdoor activities for A. around 10:00 a.m.
tomorrow, you can expect nice and clear skies for most
of the day on Saturday with a high temperature of 29. B. around 3:00 p.m.
However, things may change by Saturday evening with a C. around 6:00 p.m.
storm front moving in. We can expect light showers over
the northern part of El Salvador bringing slightly cooler
temperatures. But the rain should decrease by Sunday 5. What can people do on Sunday afternoon?
morning. It will be partly cloudy for most of the morning A. fly a kite
on Sunday, but these clouds should move out by the end B. stay home
of the afternoon. It will be windy on Sunday afternoon C. look at the stars
for those who want to fly a kite. That’s all for today’s
weather.
What for? Activity 4

Local newspapers, TV news programs, and the Write an original description of weather conditions in your
internet give local weather forecasts. They help city for the weekend.
suggest what you should wear for the day before
going out in a specific weather condition: shorts,
a warm jacket, sandals, a sweater, a rain coat. But
remember, the weather is unpredictable!
Glossary: Cooler: a little cold.

Indoors: inside a place or shelter. Unpredictable: always changing.
Showers: light rainfall.
Slightly: a little.

UNIT 3

Activity 5
Look up any new words in a dictionary. Choose the letter that best answers each question.
A: Sara, I am very happy because we will go to Balboa 1. What are they planning to do today?
Park today. It will be a wonderful day for A. go to Balboa Park
outdoor activities.
B: Yeah, but Julia, I’m a little bit worried about the
B. go to mountain biking
weather. The weather report this morning said it C. go hiking
may rain today.
A: Ah, no problem! Nothing can spoil this day. You 2. According to the weather report, when will it
know those weather reports are never correct! start raining?
B: And it said there was a chance of strong winds.
A: Don’t worry. A. in the afternoon
B: It’s raining now. B. at night
A: Do you have raincoats and umbrellas? C. in the morning
B: Uh . . . no. I don’t. I don’t have any.
A: What? Then what will we do now?
B: We can wait for the rain to stop and watch a 3. What doesn’t Sara have?
nice movie. A. raincoats and umbrellas
A: How about playing video games? B. shorts and glasses
B: Uhh. It’s raining heavier and heavier.
A: No! I can’t believe it! So what now? C. rain boots
B: Well, we could stay at home and do some indoor
activities instead. 4. Who suggests watching a movie at home?
A: That’s a good idea!
A. Julia
B. Sara
C. neither of them
5. Who suggests playing video games?

A. Julia
B. Sara
C. neither of them
6. What do they finally decide to do?

A. stay at a hotel
B. stay at home
C. go out
Glossary: Chance: opportunity or possibility.

Outdoor: outside a the house or a place. Heavier: to rain a lot.
Said: the past form of “say” which means to speak or declare. Spoil: ruin.
There was: the past form of “there is”.

UNIT 3

In El Salvador there are only two seasons during the year:
the dry and the rainy season.
Activity 7
Read and study the following table. Look up any new What is it called? Complete the following clues about weather
words in a dictionary. terms by giving the corresponding words.
Weather Other weather 1. This word starts with an “R.” It is the name of liquid
Temperatures water that falls from clouds.
patterns terms
It’s… It’s… chance of rain 2. This word starts with an “S.” It is fluffy, frozen water
that falls from clouds.
breezy freezing cold front
3. This word starts with an “H.” It is a large, strong
clear cold fog storm that has very high winds and a lot of rain.
cloudy chilly hurricane 4. This word starts with a “W.” It is the word for air that
partly cloudy warm lightening blows around outside.
damp hot precipitation 5. This word starts with a “C.” It is a visible white or
dry scorching raindrops gray mass that floats in the air and contains tiny
foggy sunrise
water drops or ice particles.
humid sunset
rainy sunshine
showery thunder
snowy tornado
stormy warm front
sunny weather forecast
windy
6 Activity

1. It’s been snowing all day, and it’s __ outside.
A. boiling
B. freezing
C. warm
2. It’s really terrible to drive in the morning __

because I can’t see more than 100 meters in front
of the car.
A. fog
B. thunder
C. raindrops
3. There is a forty percent __, so you ought to take

your umbrella to work today.
A. chance of rain
B. weather forecast
C. tornado

UNIT 3
Language in use
A. To express and ask about the weather conditions of a place, country or region, you can use the following
question form:
Question word Verb “be” Subejct Complement Possible answers
It’s
breezy
clear
Cloudy
What is the weather like? dry
foggy
rainy
snowy
stormy
sunny
windy
There are other question forms to use when you want to know about the weather. Study the following table.
Question forms Possible answers
What’s it like outside? It’s sunny and warm.
Is it raining? Yes, it is.
Is it snowing? No, it isn’t.
Is it sunny out there? Yes, it’s sunny outside.
Have you seen the weather forecast? No. I haven’t.
What’s it like out? It’s miserable out.
How’s the weather? It’s ten below. (-10 degrees)
Have you had any rain? We haven’t had a drop of rain lately.
What’s the temperature there? It’s 22 degrees Celsius.
It’s snowing here, what’s it doing there? It’s pouring outside. (raining heavily)
Beautiful day, huh? We couldn’t ask for a better day than this.
What’s the weather forecast? They’re calling for blue skies all week.
8 Activity Hands on! 3B
Answer the following questions with your own information. For the second part of your project, keep track
of the clothes or accessories you buy to use for
1. When is the dry season in El Salvador? protection from the weather. Do you buy one
2. When is the wet season in El Salvador? umbrella per season or more? Also keep track of
3. What is the weather like in the dry season? how much you spend on medicine or doctors visits
when family members get sick because of
4. What is the weather like in the rainy season? the weather.
5. What do you wear in the summer?
6. What do you wear in the winter?

UNIT 3
Activity 9
Match the vocabulary words on the left with the definitions on the right.
Words Definitions
a powerful cyclonic storm that originates in the West Indian region of the
1 humidity A Atlantic Ocean and that has heavy rains and winds exceeding seventy-three
miles, or 119 kilometers per hour
natural electricity produced in thunderstorm clouds and appearing as a bright
2 barometer B flash or streak of light in the sky
3 rain C dampness or moistness
an instrument for measuring temperature: a sealed glass tube with a calibrated
4 snow D scale on the outside and a column of liquid (mercury) inside that rises or falls
as the temperature changes
a meteorological instrument that measures atmospheric pressure, especially
5 hurricane E used to predict weather changes
6 lightning F a frozen form of precipitation that falls as ice crystals formed into flakes
7 freezing G water vapor in the atmosphere that condenses and falls from the sky to earth
8 thermometer H to predict (the weather)
9 sunny I a brief electrical storm usually accompanied by heavy rain and high winds
10 forecast J exposed to or warmed by sunlight, especially during much of each day
11 foggy K at or near the temperature at which water turns to ice
a very destructive but short-lived windstorm in the form of a funnel-shaped
12 warm L cloud that moves close to the ground destroying whatever is in its path
13 tornado M full of or covered by dense clouds
14 thunderstorm N having a great or excessive amount of wind; characterized by wind
15 winter O having or emitting moderate heat
16 windy P characterized by the presence of clouds; overcast
17 clear Q the season of the year between autumn and spring
18 cloudy R moderately cold; not warm
19 cool S free of darkness, clouds, or haze
Lesson core
Conociste las palabras que se utilizan para expresar las diferentes condiciones
del tiempo y clima que se llevan a cabo en varios lugares o regiones en Inglés.
Además, utilizaste otras palabras para expresar las estaciones del año, teniendo
presente que en El Salvador solo hay dos estaciones, las cuales son temporada
seca y temporada lluviosa. También, tuviste acceso a diferentes expresiones
y actividades relacionadas al clima. Finalmente practicaste como se puede
preguntar acerca del clima y condiciones del tiempo en Inglés.

UNIT 3
Self evaluation
1 Which statement describes

the temperature? 3 Which statement is not correct?
a) It’s hot and dry in the summer.
a) It’s breezy. b) It’s dry and warm in the summer.
b) It’s clear. c) It’s cold and rainy in the winter.
c) It’s cloudy. d) It’s sunny and warm in the winter.
d) It’s hot.
2 Which statement describes the weather?

a) It’s happy. 4 Which question is not used to ask about
the weather condition?
b) It’s frozen. a) What is the weather like?
c) It’s nice. b) Which season do you like?
d) It’s raining. c) Is it cold outside?

d) Is it sunny and warm today?
4. b 3. d 2. d 1. d Answers:
NEW CLIMATES
If you are interested in traveling to other

countries around the world, you should keep in
mind that travelers often have a difficult time
adjusting to the climate of a new area. Be sure
to check weather forecasts before you go and
bring any needed personal items or clothing
(e.g., sunblock, hat, umbrella) for your comfort.
It is easier to be prepared than to have to
buy something if a weather condition arises.
Remember that in El Salvador there are only
two seasons: the dry and rainy seasons. You
should always carry an umbrella during the rainy
season, even if it looks like it will not rain.

Unit Three Lesson 3
What is your favorite drink?
Getting started!
C
¿ ómo se dicen las diferentes clases de frutas y verduras más
comunes en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen y los diferentes tipos de bebidas en Inglés?
¿A dónde haces tus compras de la semana?
¿Cuánto gastas semanalmente en el mercado o supermercado?
I can actively exchange information about my favorite food/drink/ I can talk with peers about food usually bought at the supermarket
fruit/vegetable. while showing interest to their remarks.
I can write and read a shopping list with correct usage of singular and
Which of the following foods are types of fruit? plural forms.
1. melon 2. tomato 3. apple 4. potato 5. grapes 6. lemon
Conversation and more Activity 1

and identify the types of fruit mentioned. Look up any Answer the following questions according to the
new words in a dictionary. previous conversation.
A: Hi, Gerson. How’s everything? 1. Where do they go to drink fruit juice?
B: Hello, Julia. I’m pretty good. How about you? 2. What does Gerson order to drink?
A: I am okay. How about drinking some fruit juice? 3. What does Julia order to drink?
B: That sounds perfect because it’s hot today.
A: Too hot! Can we go to a place with air conditioning?
B: Yes, we can go to Crazy Juice. It’s around the
corner, and it is not expensive.
A: Do they have fresh juice?
B: Of course, the owner is my Uncle Tom. You can
have any kind of fruit juice there.
A: Okay. Let’s go now!
At Crazy Juice…
C: Excuse me, can I help you?
A: Sure. Do you have watermelon juice?
C: Yes, do you want a single or a double glass?
A: Oh! A double, please.
C: How about you?
B: I’d like a frozen lemonade.
Glossary:
Juice: a drink made of fruit.
Owner: the proprietor or possessor.

UNIT 3

Fruits and vegetables are necessary for a balanced diet. Study the list of the common fruits and vegetables.
Listen to and repeat each word out loud.
Fruits
apple grapes melon watermelon strawberry orange
coconut pineapple peach lemons tomato avocado
Vegetables
potato beans rice cucumber
cauliflower broccoli lettuce
2 Activity
Answer the following questions with your own Don’t forget!

information.
Most people think tomatoes and avocados are
1. Which types of fruit do you like? vegetables, but they are actually types of fruit because
2. Which vegetables do you like? they contain seeds!
3. What kind of natural fruit juice do you like?

UNIT 3
Time to read
Listen to and read the following passage about a British
Activity 3
specialty dish carefully. Look up any new words in Choose the letter that best answers each question.
a dictionary.
1. Fish and chips are popular only in England.
A.True
B. False
C. It doesn’t say.
2. Americans call “french fries” what British

call “chips”.
A.True
B. False
“Fish and chips” is a popular takeout food in Britain. It is 3. Americans call “chips” what British call “crisps”.
a deep-fried, battered portion of fish served with deep-
fried potatoes. Fish and chips is originally from Britain, A.True
but it is also very popular in Australia, Canada, Ireland, B. False
New Zealand, and South Africa. For decades it was the C. It doesn’t say.
dominant (if not the only) takeout food in the
United Kingdom.
4. The potato was introduced to Europe in the
The fried potatoes are called chips in Britain and many 18th century.
other countries around the world, but Americans call A.True
them french fries. Potato chips, an American invention, B. False
are a different food made from potatoes. They are known
as crisps in Britain. C. It doesn’t say.
It is unclear when and where these two foods began 5. The dish became popular in the 19th century.
being served together. Fish and potatoes were eaten
separately for many years in Britain, but they were eaten A. True
together and became popular in London in the middle B. False
of the 19th century. During World War II, fish and chips C. It doesn’t say.
were one of the few foods that were not rationed
in Britain.
6. Fish and chips were not eaten during World
War II.
A.True
What for?
B. False
Most people should aim for at least nine servings
(at least 4½ cups) of vegetables and fruit a day. Go
for a variety of kinds and colors of produce to give
your body the mixture of nutrients it needs: dark
leafy greens, cooked red tomatoes, etc.
Glossary: Dominant: powerful or popular.

Takeout food: food to go or take home. Rationed: share or portion.
Increasingly: more and more.

UNIT 3

Mario is visiting his friend Jaime to have a family dinner. A: Hi, Mario!
Listen to and read the following conversation carefully. B: Hi, Jaime, how’s it going?
A: Fine, and you?
B: Oh, you know.
A: No, I don’t. How are you?
C: Hello, Mario, how are you?
B: Very well. Thank you, Mrs. Aguilar.
A: Mom, can we go and play in my room?
C: Yes, after dinner. We’re having pizza tonight,
Mario. Is that alright?
B: Yes, Mrs. Aguilar, that should be fine. But I am
a vegetarian.
C: Oh, Jaime, you didn’t tell me!
A: Sorry, I didn’t know.
C: Well, it’s okay. Then, I’ll order a mushroom pizza
as well.
B: I’m sorry if it’s any trouble, Mrs. Aguilar.
C: Don’t worry, Mario, it’s not your fault. We can eat
the salami pizza and you can have the mushroom
pizza. Why don’t you both go and play upstairs.
A: Okay. Let’s go upstairs.
4 Activity

1. Mario comes for dinner. 5. Mario will eat anything.
A.True A.True
B. False B. False
C. It doesn’t say. C. It doesn’t say.
2. Mario never eats pizza.
6. Jaime’s Mom only has pizza with meat.
A.True
B. False
A.True
B. False
3. Jaime loves salami.
A.True 7. Vegetarians don’t eat meat.
B. False A.True
C. It doesn’t say. B. False
4. Mario tells Mrs. Aguilar that he is vegetarian. 8. Jaime and Mario eat after playing.
A.True A.True
B. False B. False
C. It doesn’t say. C. It doesn’t say.
Glossary: Trouble: to bother.

Vegetarian: a person who does not eat any meat.
Didn’t: the past tense form of “does not”.

UNIT 3

Study the table below that contains common foods, drinks, and dishes.
Fruits Vegetables Meats Other Drinks Dishes

apple asparagus bacon beans peanut coffee bowl
apricot beet beef bone pepper cream cup
avocado cabbage chicken bread pie ice fork
banana carrot fish butter rice juice glass
berry cauliflower ham candy roll lemonade knife
cantaloupe celery hamburger cake salad milk napkin
cherry corn hotdog catsup salt orange juice plate
coconut cucumber lamb cereal sandwich soda saucer
fruit garlic meat cheese sauce tea spoon
grapefruit green pork chocolate spaghetti water pan
grape lettuce meat loaf cookie sugar wine pitcher
lemon mushroom roast dessert vanilla pot
lime onion sausage egg vinegar
orange pea turkey flour
peach potato honey
pear pumpkin ice cream
pineapple radish jam
plum squash jelly
prune sweet potato macaroni
raisin potato mayonnaise
raspberry turnip mustard
strawberry noodle
tomato nut
watermelon oil
5 Activity
Hands on! 3C
Unscramble the following words and write one original
sentence for each. Look at the example below.
For the third part of your project, you have to keep
Example: izzap – pizza I like to eat pizza. track of how much your family spends on foods
1. snairategev and goods bought in a month at the supermarket
or store. Do you go to the supermarket once a
2. imalas week and buy enough food to last until the next
3. romushom week, or do you go to the store every day to buy a
4. atem few things? Keep track of everything!
5. otmato

UNIT 3
Language In use
Countable and non-countable nouns
Countable nouns are those nouns that can be counted
Activity 6
per units. They have plural forms: apple-apples, tomato-
tomatoes, radish-radishes, orange-oranges, knife-knives. Answer the following questions with your own information.
1. Do you like onions? What vegetables do
Examples: you like?
1. There is a tomato in the refrigerator. 2. Do you like mangoes? What kinds of fruit do you like?
2. There are three knives on the dining table.
3. What fruits and vegetables don’t you like?
Non-countables are nouns which are too small or too big 4. What other foods do you like or not like?
to count. They may be particles, liquids, gases, concepts 5. What kinds of juice do you like?
or activities. Non-countable or uncountable nouns are
always singular and have different words to categorize 6. What is your brother or sister’s favorite food?
units. Use the singular form of the verb with uncountable 7. What food do your grandparents like?
nouns: water- glass of water, bread- loaf of bread, 8. What’s your favorite ice cream flavor?
furniture- piece of furniture.
9. What’s your favorite restaurant?
Examples: 10. What’s your favorite food from El Salvador?
1. There is some water in that pitcher. 11. What’s your favorite food from outside of
2. That is the equipment we use for the project. El Salvador?
Study the following chart of non-countable nouns:

Categories Examples
fluids / liquids water, coffee, tea, milk, oil, gasoline, wine
solids ice, bread, butter, cheese, meat, gold, chalk silver, glass
gases air, oxygen, nitrogen, smoke, smog, pollution, steam
particles rice, corn, dirt, dust, flour, sugar, grass, hair, pepper, salt
collective nouns baggage, luggage, clothing, furniture, food, fruit, money, traffic, garbage, scenery, junk, mail,
(grouped items) jewelry, homework, housework, work, grammar, slang, vocabulary
happiness, health, love, fun, help, honesty, peace, progress, beauty knowledge, justice,
abstractions intelligence, luck music, time, space, energy, mass, gravity
languages Arabic, French, Spanish, English, Portuguese
language study grammar, slang, vocabulary
fields of study chemistry, engineering, art, philosophy, science, law
recreation basketball, soccer, baseball, dance
activities (gerunds) sleeping, driving, writing, studying, swimming, studying, rock climbing, sky diving
natural weather, fog, heat, humidity, lightning, rain, snow, thunder, wind, darkness, light, sunshine,
phenomena electricity, fire
I have a lot of homeworks to do.
She is washing her hairs.
common mistakes: The equipments weren’t working well.
My baggages were lost. (suitcases)
I bought new furnitures.

UNIT 3
Choose whether the noun is countable or uncountable. Complete the following statements about food by filling in the
blanks with the words given below. Look up any new words in
1. coffee a dictionary.
A. countable
B. uncountable sweet bitter succulent starve moist
2. water
thirsty rich dry full sour
A. countable
B. uncountable
3. wine 1. A lemon or an unripe apple tastes __.
A. countable 2. After you eat a lot or when you can’t eat any more,
B. uncountable you are __.
4. knife 3. Not having enough water, liquid, or moisture mean
A. countable something is __.
B. uncountable 4. When a cake or sauce contains a lot of dairy products
5. sugar such as butter, cream or sugar we say it is __.
A. countable 5. When a person wants a drink, he or she is __.
B. uncountable
6. The word __ is used favorably to describe cakes and
bread that taste good and are the opposite of dry.
8 Activity
7. The real meaning of this word is to die or suffer from
hunger, but we use it colloquially to describe being
hungry. This word is __.
8. The word __ is used when talking about fruit or
Listen to and repeat the following questions, and meat that is juicy and tastes good.
then answer them with your own information. 9. Something that tastes like unsweetened cocoa or
beer is said to be __.
1. Which fruits do you like? 10. __ is the opposite of sour, and it means that
2. Which vegetables do you like? something tastes sugary or full of honey.
3. What kind of food do you like to order in your
favorite restaurant?
4. What are some examples of vegetables grown in
El Salvador?
5. What are some examples of fruits grown in
El Salvador? Lesson core
Conociste los nombres más comunes de frutas
9 Activity
y verduras así como los nombres de varios platos
o tipos de comida que se consumen en nuestro
país. Además, practicaste la pronunciación de
Write a shopping list of the ingredients that are used to estas clases de alimentos y como se escriben en el
cook the following foods. idioma Inglés. También, tuviste acceso a muchas
palabras o frases relacionadas al tema de la comida
1. chicken soup y leíste información acerca varios tipos de platos de
2. vegetable salad
diferentes países. Finalmente conociste y practicaste
dos tipos de sustantivos como son los count y los
3. a hamburger non-count en diferentes contextos y ejercicios.
4. pupusas

UNIT 3
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following items is a drink?

a) orange 3 Which of the following are
countable nouns?
b) apple a) mango
c) milk b) rice
d) melon c) cucumbers
d) sugar
2 Which of the following are fruits?

a) avocado 4 Which of the following are the
non-countable nouns?
b) kiwi a) radish
c) strawberry b) water
d) pineapple c) lettuce
d) pear
4. b, c 3.a, c 2. a, b, c, d 1. c Answers:
MEALS
In El Salvador, most families eat three meals a

day. Breakfast is usually the first meal of the
day and is eaten between 6 a.m. and 9 a.m.
Lunch is around noon and supper, which is also
called dinner, is eaten at about 6 p.m. Many
Salvadorans have snacks during the day between
the main meals. In school, students usually have
breaks in the morning and in the afternoon.
At this time the children usually eat snacks. In
the workplace, employees often have a “coffee
break” in the morning around 10 a.m. and again
in the afternoon around 2 p.m. Most people not
only drink coffee but also have snacks. Every
culture has different customs about when meals
are eaten.

Unit Three Lesson 4
Do you have change for
Getting started!
a five dollar bill?
C
¿ ómo se dicen las diferentes denominaciones de las monedas
de dólar en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen las diferentes denominaciones de los billetes de
dólar en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen las cantidades de dinero en Inglés?
¿Cuáles son los ingresos y egresos de tu familia?
I can tell and write prices from pictures of clothes and accessories with
their corresponding price tags.
Which of the following are denominations of coins?
1. dime 2. bank 3. penny 4. check 5. teller 6. quarter 7. bill

identify the denominations of coins that are used. Look
up any new words in a dictionary.
A: Hey, Monica. How are you?
B: Hi, Eduardo. I’m fine. What’s up?
A: Can you do me a favor? Give me change for a
dollar, please.
B: Of course. Just let me look for the coins in my
pocket.
Activity 1
A: Do you have quarters or dimes?
B: Here you are… four quarters. Answer the following questions according to the
A: Thanks a lot, Monica. previous conversation.
B: Excuse me, Eduardo. What do you want those
coins for? 1. Who wants change for a dollar?
A: I need to make a phone call and I don’t have any 2. What does he want the coins for?
credit on my cell phone.
3. Who does not have credit on their cell phone?
B: Oh, come on! Eduardo, here you can use my
cell phone! 4. Who offers to lend their cell phone?
A: I really appreciate your help.
B: You’re welcome. That is what friends are for.

UNIT 3

Denominations of U.S. currency
Denominations refer to the different values of money. These coins are currently made in the following denominations.
Listen to and repeat each word out loud.
penny nickel dime
quarter half dollar one dollar

The most common denominations of bills of U.S. currency in production are the following. Listen to and repeat each
word out loud.
one dollar bill ten dollar bill fifty dollar bill
five dollar bill twenty dollar bill one hundred dollar bill
2 Activity
Don’t forget!
Match the names of the coins with their descriptions.
1 penny A one hundred cents You may be interested to know that the penny is the most
2 nickle B fifty cents widely used denomination currently in circulation, and it
remains profitable to make. The U.S. Congress determines
3 dime C twenty-five cents the denominations of coins that are used and the Mint
4 quarter D ten cents must produce them and put them into circulation.
5 half dollar E five cents
6 one dollar F one cent

UNIT 3
Time to read
Listen to and read the following passage about a family
Activity 4
budget. Look up any new words in a dictionary. Fill in the blanks to the following sentences using the words
given below.
budget deficit balanced budget
1. In a __, the amount of money that is coming in is
equal to the money that is going out.
2. A ___ consists of a spending plan and a list of
spendable funds.
3. Spending more money than you have creates ___.
Activity 5
Raising a family on a small income isn’t easy. You have
to find out a way in which you can control your money. 1. Do you have a personal budget?
Creating a balanced budget allows you to live well and 2. Does your family have a monthly budget?
have money left at the end of the month.
For years my family and I barely scraped by. No matter 3. What is your family monthly income?
how much money my husband and I made, it was 4. Are you a saver or a big spender?
gone at the end of the month. Sometimes we had 5. Do you use credit cards?
accumulated even more debt. When our income grew,
our expenses somehow grew also. It seemed that no 6. Do you buy with cash?
matter what we did, we were always left with nothing by
the time the 30th rolled around.
That was the story until I sat down and made our family
budget. You have no idea how much money we wasted Hands on! 3D
over the years, and you are probably doing the same
right now. By creating a family budget, you will be able to For the fourth part of the project, calculate the total
identify where you are spending more than you should monthly income of your family. Also calculate the
and how to take control of your family finances. total amount of expenses for one month.
3 Activity
Decide whether the following statements are true or false. Don’t forget!
1. Raising a family on a small income is easy.
2. Creating a balanced budget allows you to live well. Quarters, nickels, and dimes are currently made from
nickel and copper, and pennies are currently made from
3. When the family’s income grew, their expenses grew copper plated zinc. This currency is used in El Salvador
also. and accepted in many countries around the world.
4. The family saved a lot of money over the years.
Glossary: Grew: the past tense of “grow” which means increase.

Income: the total amount of money a family receives from working. Rolled around: that the day was close or near.
Balanced budget: well structured financial plan. Sat down: the past tense of “sit down”.
Left: remaining. Mint: the place where coins and bills are made.
Scraped by: survived with little or no money.
Debt: amount or sum of money which is not paid.
UNIT 3

It’s Saturday morning and Jaime is talking with the cashier
Activity 6
at the bank. Listen to and read the following conversation Decide whether the following statements are true or false.
carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
1. Jaime is at a hotel.
2. The cashier asks for his identification.
3. Jaime uses his passport as his ID.
4. Jaime can drive.
5. Jaime wants to open more than one account.
6. Jaime asks to open a savings account and a
checking account.
7. Jaime works in a bank.
8. Jaime can’t have a credit card.
9. The cashier fills in the forms for Jaime.
A: I’d like to open a bank account, please.

B: Certainly. Do you have some form of identification?
A: Yes, I have my I.D. Is that ok?
B: Yes, Mr. Jaime… Jaime Grande. We also need
proof of your current address. Do you have a utility
bill or your driver’s license with you?
A: I have my driver’s license.
B: What kind of account do you want?
A: Well, I want a checking account and a
savings account.
B: That’s fine, we do both. Do you have any proof
of income?
A: Yes, I have my pay slips for the last three months.
Here you are.
B: How much do you want to deposit in What for?
both accounts?
A: I’ll deposit two hundred dollars in each. Having a credit card is almost essential in our
B: Good. You could also apply for a credit card at the lives today, but be sure to seek advice on what
credit card is best for you. You want to avoid
same time, if you like. debt at all cost because it will always be an
A: Yes, that would be great. unwelcomed friend.
B: Ok. If you would just fill out these forms.

UNIT 3

Read the following family budget template carefully. Use Activity 7
a dictionary to look up any new words.
Complete a family budget template with your
Monthly own information.
Category Budgeted
Amount
INCOME:
Salary $ 500.00
Bonuses
Interest Received
Investment/Dividend Income
Miscellaneous
INCOME SUBTOTAL $ 500.00
EXPENSES:
Rent/Mortgage
Water/Sewer
Electricity
Cable/Internet Activity 8
Telephone
Make a pie chart to show your monthly expenses distribution
Savings in percentages from 0% to 100%. Look at the sample
Debt Payments (credit cards, etc.) graph below.
Transportation/Commuting (bus,
gas, etc.) Food 30%
Child Care Clothing 5%
Food/Groceries (include dining out) Bus 5%
Health Care (medical/dental/vision) Education 20%
Clothing Credit card 10%
Miscellaneous Housing 15%
EXPENSES SUBTOTAL $425.00 Health 15%
Income Minus Expenses $ 75.00 ____
100%
Remember that in your monthly family budget you can
include other categories or subcategories according to Food
your own situation. To create a budget, put the income
first. Then, include all of your expenses. At the end, Clothing
subtract the expenses from the incomes.
Bus
Education
Credit card
Housing
Health

UNIT 3
Language in use
A. To make change for a dollar or any other denominations,
you can use the following question forms:
Activity 10
Auxiliary Subject Verb Complement Write down as many ways as you can to make change for a one
give me change for a dollar, hundred dollar bill using fifty dollar ($50), twenty dollar ($20),
Can you please? ten dollar ($10), five dollar ($5) and/or one dollar bills.
Do you have change for a dollar?
Examples:
get change for a dollar,
Could I 1. two fifty dollar bills
please?
Would you break a dollar bill, please? 2. five twenty dollar bills
9 Activity Conversation and more

Miguel wants to take the bus, but he finds himself short
Write down as many ways as you can to make change for a of change, so he asks his friend Boris if he has some.
dollar using half dollars (50¢), quarters (25¢), dimes (10¢), Listen to and read the following conversation.
nickels (5¢) and/or pennies (1¢).
A: Hi, Boris. Do you have change for a dollar?
Examples: B: Hello, Miguel. You’re in luck. I do. What do you
1. two half dollars need it for?
A: I need some change for the bus.
2. four quarters B: How do you want it?
A: I need a couple of quarters and five dimes.
B: Here you are two quarters and five dimes.
A: Thank you so much.
B: You’re welcome. Oh! Here comes my bus.
Take care.
A: Bye.
Activity 11
Now answer the following questions about the
1. Where are they?
2. Who wants a change for a dollar?
3. What does the person need it for?
4. How does the person want it?

UNIT 3
12 Activity

1. The Lincoln Memorial appears on the back of 3. U.S. coins are magnetic.
which bill? A. True
A. $20 B. False
B. $10 C. This is true except for pennies.
C. $5 D. This is false except for pennies.
D. $1
4. Whose head appears on a U.S. five cent coin?
2. Whose head appears on one side of a U.S. fifty A. Abraham Lincoln
cent coin?
B. George Washington
A. Lincoln
C. Thomas Jefferson
B. Roosevelt
C. Kennedy
D. Franklin D. Roosevelt
D. Jefferson
13 Activity
The following idioms all contain the word “coin”. Try to match the idioms with their corresponding definitions.
Idioms Definition
1 to coin a phrase A To earn a lot of money quickly.
pay someone back When two things are very closely related even though they
2 in their own coin B seem different.
the other side of A different and usually opposite view of a situation that you have
3 the coin C previously talked about.
be two sides of the
4 same coin D To treat someone in the same bad way that they have treated you.
Something that you say before you use a phrase which sounds
5 be coining it E slightly silly.
Lesson core
Conociste las diferentes denominaciones tanto de monedas como de

papel moneda o billetes de dólares. Practicaste como se dicen, escriben
y utilizan en diferentes contextos. Además, conociste las partes más
comunes que contiene un presupuesto familiar y practicaste como
crear tu propio presupuesto familiar de gastos y egresos mensuales.
También, estudiaste como cambiar monedas o billetes de diferentes
denominaciones en Inglés. Finalmente, leíste y escuchaste acerca de temas
relacionados al presupuesto familiar.

UNIT 3
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following are

coin denominations? 3 Which coins make a dollar?
a) ten dimes
a) dime b) four quarters
b) nickel c) four dimes and two quarters
c) check d) twenty nickels
d) bank note
2 Which of the following are

bill denominations? 4 Which bills make 10 dollars?
a) ten ones
a) a five dollar bill b) two fives
b) a ten dollar bill c) five ones and one five
c) a silver dollar d) twenty ones
d) a gold dollar
4. a, b, c 3. a, b, d 2. a, b 1. a, b Answers:
SPENDING MONEY
Most people have a two-fold personality when
it comes to spending money. One side of them
likes to be very frugal. It tries to save money
on clothes, groceries, and other necessities. It
does not like to buy things that it does not need.
The other side is not very careful with money.
It is the side of people that buys things that it
does not need (like a cappuccino or another
pair of shoes). This is also the side of people
that spends cash quickly and easily. They do
not carry cash with them anymore because it is
too easy to spend without thinking about what
they spend it on. Before going shopping, people
should think about the things they really need
versus the things they want.

Unit Three Lesson 5
How much is that?
Getting started!
C
¿ ómo se pregunta por los precios de los muebles o
artículos en Inglés?
¿Cómo son los diferentes muebles o electrodomésticos que
tienes en tu casa u oficina en Inglés?
¿Cuáles son las diferentes formas de decir los precios
en Inglés?
¿Cómo se separan las cifras de dinero en Inglés?
I can read and identify colors and prices of items in furniture ads. I can list clothing items and furniture with accurate spelling.
I can name pieces of furniture with correct pronunciation.
Which of the following items are pieces of furniture?

1. sofa 2. blender 3. wall cabinet 4. refrigirator 5. desk
Activity 1
6. iron 7. bookcase
Conversation and more 1. What color is Alex painting the walls?
Listen to and read the following conversation carefully. 2. What is he buying?
Look up any new words in a dictionary. 3. What is he hanging?
A: Hi, Alex. How are you doing with your bedroom? 4. Where is he moving his bed?
B: Well, Gloria, first I’m painting the walls. I am
painting them light purple. At the moment they
are white.
A: And what about furniture?
B: That’s the second thing. I am buying a new desk, a
bright red one. And I am hanging some shelves for
my CDs.
A: And where are you sleeping?
B: Right… Then I am moving my bed under the
window. I like sunshine in the morning.
A: Good idea! What about your clothes?
B: I am keeping them in my mom and dad’s
bedroom. I don’t want a closet.
A: Are your mom and dad happy about that?
B: They don’t know yet.
A: Maybe you should tell them!

UNIT 3

Furniture and electrical appliances
Furniture is household equipment designed for a variety of purposes. It may be made of wood, metal, plastic, stone,
glass, fabric, or other materials.
Listen to and repeat each piece of furniture out loud.
living room set entertainment center computer desk bookshelf
bed closet dressing table mirror

There are two kinds of appliances: small appliances and major appliances. All appliances are intended to perform,
enable, or assist in performing a job to make our lives easier.
Listen to and repeat each appliance out loud.
washing machine refrigerator stereo iron
blow dryer toaster blender coffee maker
2 Activity

1. Which appliances are in your kitchen? 4. Which pieces of furniture are in your living room?
2. Which pieces of furniture are in your kitchen? 5. What furniture is in your bedroom?
3. Which appliances are in your living room? 6. What appliances and pieces of furniture are in
your bathroom?

UNIT 3
Time to read
Listen to and read the following reading passage carefully.
Activity 3
1. How many rooms does the house have?
A. twelve
B. five
2. What color does rosemary like?

A. red
B. pink
3. How many armchairs does her living room have?

A. three
B. two
4. What things does her study have?

A. a computer and a stereo
B. a refrigerator and a sofa
5. How many people does Rosemary’s dining

table seat?
The ideal house for Rosemary A. six
B. twelve
Rosemary just bought her dream home. It is a big
house in the countryside. Her house has twelve rooms
including: a big kitchen, a living room, a dining room, 6. Does she like to cook?
two bathrooms, five bedrooms, a study, and an exercise A. Yes, she does.
room. Rosemary likes the color pink, so every room has
either pink or red curtains. In each bedroom, she has a B. No, she doesn’t.
double bed, a cedar chest with a TV on it, and a big walk-
in closet. Her living room has a big, brown sofa and three 7. Is Rosemary happy with her new home?
comfortable armchairs. There is also a new LCD TV and
DVD player. Since Rosemary likes to have dinner parties, A. Yes, she is.
her dining room has a big table that seats twelve people. B. No, she isn’t.
Rosemary’s kitchen has a lot of space because she likes
to cook. Her refrigerator is extra large to keep a lot of
8. What does she like to do in her study?
food. She doesn’t have a microwave because she prefers
to eat fresh food. Her study has many books, an antique A. dance
oak desk, a new computer, and a stereo system because B. listen to music
Rosemary likes to listen to music when she studies.
Rosemary is very happy in her new home.
Glossary: Oak and cedar: are kinds of trees.

Bought: the past tense of “buy” which means purchase or obtain. Antique: very old.
Countryside: outside of the city.
Wooden: made from a tree.

UNIT 3

Activity 4
1. Where are Oscar and Milagro?
A. at a music store
B. at a furniture store
2. Are they married now?

A. No, they aren’t.
B. Yes, they are.
3. Do they have to buy bedroom furniture?

A. Yes, they do.
B. No, they don’t.
A: Oscar, I really don’t understand why we need new 4. How much is the bed?
furniture. After we get married, A. three hundred fifty dollars
we will just need a few things from each of
our apartments. B. five hundred dollars
B: Milagro, we both have some nice things, but it
would be nice to have furniture that matches. 5. How much will they spend on things for the
Right now we have six dining chairs and none living room?
of them are the same style. A. five hundred fifty dollars
A: Yeah, that’s true. At least we won’t have to shop for
bedroom furniture. We’re lucky that your parents B. five hundred dollars
are giving us some second hand things including:
a dresser, two nightstands, and a headboard. All 6. How many more stores do they have to visit?
we need is a bed. How much does a nice and
comfortable king size bed cost? A. three more
B. four more
B: I think about $350.
A: That is too expensive.
B: That’s true, but we still need a bed. We are also
missing a coffee table, two side tables, two table
lamps, a floor lamp and a big plasma TV set in the
living room.
A: Do we really need all of that? How much do you Hands on! 3E
think we will spend?
B: About $500. And we really need everything.
A: Alright, I was just hoping to get home in time for In the final part of the project, keep track of how
the soccer game this afternoon. much your family spends monthly on purchasing
B: No problem. We only have four more stores to visit or paying for the furniture and appliances that are
after this one. in your home.
A: Four?
B: Yes, now come on. How are you going to get home
in time for the game if you don’t hurry up?
Glossary: Lucky: fortunate or blessed.

Keep: maintain. Second hand: used things or not new things.
Won’t: the future negative form.

UNIT 3

Study the list of common pieces of furniture and home appliances in different rooms of a house. Does your house
contain all of these items?
Living room Kitchen Bedroom Bathroom
couch (sofa) stove bed sink
table oven dresser bathtub
chair refrigerator closet shower
recliner freezer nightstand shower curtain
love seat sink bookcase toilet
coffee table dishwasher shelves medicine cabinet
end table coffee maker picture mirror
lamp mixer curtains scale
television saucepan carpet (rug) soap dish
frying pan bath mat
teakettle washcloth
measuring cup towel rack
can opener toilet paper
egg beater faucet
knife sink plug
cutting board
baking pan
trash can
5 Activity
Fill in all the blanks using the words given below. The first letter of each word is given.
armchair coffee table entertainment center picture love seat rug table lamp
bookcase end table floor lamp plant recliner sofa television
1. A s__ can seat three or four people. A l__ can only 8. My mother waters the p__ once or twice a week.
seat two. 9. What a beautiful Persian r__ you have on the living
2. There is a lamp and an ashtray on the e__ next to room floor.
the sofa. 10. Where did you get the p__ that is hanging on the
3. If you need more light, turn on the t__ that is on the wall over the love seat? It’s beautiful.
end table. 11. My living room set consists of a sofa, a love seat and
4. My father watches television in the r__. When he an a__ .
gets tired, he pushes it back and goes to sleep. 12. We need a new light bulb for the f__ that is behind
5. There is a television set, a stereo system and a DVD the sofa.
player on the e__. 13. Does your t__ have cable?
6. There are a lot of books on the b__ .
7. You can set your cup down on the c__ . Help
yourself to some cookies.

UNIT 3
Language in use
To provide or ask for the prices of furniture and home appliances, you can use the following question forms and answer
them with the following possible answers. Study the table below.
Question word Auxiliary or verb Subject Possible answers
How much is the sofa? It’s one hundred fifty dollars.
How much are the lamps? They are seventy dollars each.
How much is that? It’s five dollars and sixty cents.
How much are those? They are five hundred dollars.
How much does it cost It costs three hundred and forty-seven dollars.
How much do they cost? They are four hundred ninety-nine dollars.
sofa set dining room set entertainment center bookcase
computer hutch dresser microwave stereo
stove
refrigerator washing machine
Listen to and write the prices to the following pieces of 1. What pieces of furniture do you have in the different
pieces of furniture and appliances. rooms of your house or apartment?
2. What appliances do you have in the different rooms
of your house or apartment?

UNIT 3
8 Activity
Match the appliances on the left with their corresponding meanings on the right.
Applicances Meanings
1 stove A Electric appliance that washes dishes.
2 washing machine B Electric appliance used to dry laundry.
3 oven C Electric appliance used for keeping food cold.
4 microwave D Electric appliance used for keeping food frozen (very cold).
Located inside a drain of a sink; chops up bits of food into small pieces to fit
5 garbage disposal E down the pipes.
6 freezer F Electric appliance for cooking food quickly.
7 fridge G Electric or gas appliance for baking and heating food.
8 dryer H Electric appliance for washing clothes.
9 dishwasher I Electric or gas elements on top of an oven for heating, frying, and boiling food.
9 Activity
Match the corresponding pieces of furniture to their meanings below.

armchair coffee table entertainment center desk bed chair cupboards
bookcase end table changing table counter recliner sofa dresser
1. It’s a long frame with a mattress on top for sleeping, 7. It’s a storage area with doors that is used for holding
and it has blankets and pillows for comfort. food, dishes, cleaning supplies, or
2. It’s a tall, wooden piece of furniture used for other things.
holding books. 8. It’s a piece of furniture used to work on and hold
3. There are various types of this piece of furniture papers, books, and writing tools. It’s usually found in
but all are used for sitting. an office.
4. It’s a surface found in a nursery, which is used for 9. It’s a piece of furniture that holds folded clothing.
changing a baby’s diaper. 10. It’s a piece of furniture that holds a television, stereo,
5. It’s a long, comfortable piece of furniture for and other electronic devices.
sitting on and is usually found in common rooms
or living rooms.
6. It’s a surface in the kitchen that is used for
preparing food and holding small appliances.
Lesson core
Conociste como se escriben y se dicen diferentes nombres de los electrodomésticos

y muebles más comunes en Inglés. También, practicaste como preguntar y responder
cuánto cuestan algunos de estos artículos que se utilizan en cualquier hogar.
Practicaste como se dicen diversas cantidades de dinero tanto en números como en
palabras. Además, estudiaste los diversos artículos que se encuentran en diferentes
cuartos o habitaciones de tu hogar. Finalmente, tuviste acceso a varios textos
relacionados a muebles y electrodomésticos.

UNIT 3
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following items is a

piece of furniture? 3 Which questions are used to ask
for prices?
a) blender a) How many do you have?
b) toaster b) How much are they?
c) armchair c) How many do you need?
d) freezer d) How much does it cost?
2 Which of the following items is

an appliance? 4 Which statement stands for $ 499?
a) four hundred nineteen dollars
a) table b) four hundred ninety dollars
b) bookcase c) four hundred ninety-nine dollars
c) entertainment center d) four hundred nine dollars
d) washing machine
4. c 3. b, d 2. d 1. c Answers:
FURNITURE
The furniture that you have in your home is
probably as important as the home itself. It is
what makes you feel comfortable and happy to
be at home. The furniture you choose depends
on your taste, your budget and the style of
your home. When buying furniture, you should
choose good, quality pieces. These will be more
expensive but they will last longer. Furniture is
something that you use every day, so it should
be able to resist daily wear and tear. Keep in
mind that if you are short on money, you can
purchase good second-hand furniture that is
high quality, or you can look for special sales at
different stores.

Answer Key
Lesson 1 5. cloud
Activity 1: 1. a pair of jeans 2. size 36 3. light
brown or khaki Activity 9: 1. C 2. E 3. G 4. F 5. A 6. B 7. K 8. D
9. J 10. H 11. M 12. O 13. L 14. I
Activity 2: 1. J 2. I 3. H 4. G 5. F 6. E 7. D 8. C
9. B 10. A 15. Q 16. N 17. S 18. P 19. R
Activity 3. 1. True 2. False 3. False 4. True 5. True
6. True
Activity 4: 1. bargain 2. sale 3. exchange 4. refund Lesson 3
5. try them on 6. size 7. fit 8. tag
9. label 10. sales clerk 11. advice Activity 1: 1. Crazy Juice 2. frozen lemonade
12. cashier 13. credit card 14. check 3. watermelon juice
15. cash 16. receipt Activity 2: Answers may vary.
Activity 5: 1. B 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. C 6. B Activity 3: 1. B 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. B
Activity 6: 1. seven hundred and fifty 2. nine Activity 4: 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. B 7. A 8. B
hundred and forty-nine 3. six hundred Activity 5: 1. vegetarians 2. salami 3. mushroom
and seventy-three 4. nine hundred and 4. meat 5. tomato
eighty-eight
Activity 7: 1. 450 2. 250 3. 950 4. 350 5. 1000
Activity 7: 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. B
Activity 9: 1. tie 2. hat 3. belt 4. swimming suit
5. sweater 6. pajamas 7. pants 8. gloves Activity 9: Answers may vary.
9. boots 10. jeans Activity 10: 1. sour 2. full 3. dry 4. rich 5. thirsty
Activity 10: 1. C 2. A 6. moist 7. starve 8. succulent 9. bitter
10. Sweet
Lesson 2 Lesson 4
Activity 1: Conversation 1: It’s cold and cloudy. Activity 1: 1. Eduardo 2. to make a phone call
3. Eduardo 4. Monica
Conversation 2: It’s raining and cold.
Activity 2: 1. F 2. E 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. A
Activity 2: 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. A
Activity 3: 1. False 2. True 3. True 4. False
Activity 3: 1. B 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A
Activity 4: 1. balanced budget 2. budget 3. deficit
Activity 5: 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. B
Activity 6: 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. True
Activity 6: 1. B 2. A 3. A
6. True 7. False 8. False 9. False
Activity 7: 1. rain 2. snow 3. hurricane 4. wind

Answer Key
Activity 11: 1. at the bus stop or on a street
2. Miguel 3. for the bus 4. two quarters
and five dimes
Activity 12: 1. C 2. C 3. B 4. C
Activity 13: 1. E 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. A
Lesson 5
Activity 1: 1. light purple 2. a new desk 3. shelves
for his CDs 4. under the window
Activity 3: 1.A 2.B 3.A 4.A 5.B 6.A 7.A 8.B
Activity 4: 1.B 2.A 3.B 4.A 5.B 6.B
Activity 5: 1. sofa, love seat 2. end table 3. table
lamp 4. recliner 5. entertainment center
6. bookcase 7. coffee table 8. plants
9. rug 10. picture 11. armchair
12. floor lamp 13. television
Activity 6: 1. $475 2. $400 3. $150 4. $350
5. $260 6. $390 7. $500 8. $470 9. $95
10. $385 11. $399 12. $500
Activity 8: 1. I 2. H 3. G 4. F 5. E 6. D 7. C 8. B
9. A
Activity 9: 1. bed 2. bookcase 3. chair 4. changing
table 5. sofa 6. counter
7. cupboards 8. desk 9. dresser
10. entertaiment center

Hands on!
“My monthly budget”
Purpose
With this project you will be able to improve your English skills on how to fill out specific sections of a simple
monthly family budget in which you will state your incomes and expenses.
Theory and practice

The different phases of the unit 3 project (from Hands on! 2A to Hands on! 2F) gave you ideas on how to
understand the concepts or sections which are included in any family budget form.
With these different project phases you should have kept track of key elements or concepts to have a clear picture
of what could be included in the sections of the budget.
Development
You should have noticed that when answering the content of different activities, you were gaining or obtaining
the basic knowledge to complete your own family budget form or template.
Take another look at the activities which gave you good practice to have an idea on how to create your own
budget form. The activities provided you with some good background, and with this you will be able to perform
or do your project efficiently.
Wrap up
To complete the second project , fill out the sections of the family budget form which you printed off at the
beginning of unit 3. Save this budget, complete with your information, as it will help you on future projects. Do
not forget to include a pie chart or graph to distribute your family’s expenses in percentages.
Check out the following URL to print a sample:
http://www.vklife365.com/budget.html

Resources
For the use of a bilingual dictionary:

For more about clothing:

http://www.eflnet.com/vocab/clothing_vocabulary.php
http://web2.uvcs.uvic.ca/elc/StudyZone/200/vocab/cloth1.htm
For more on weather conditions:

http://www.englishclub.com/vocabulary/weather-vocabulary.htm
http://www.inglesmundial.com/B15/vocabulary.htm
http://www.teach-nology.com/worksheets/science/weather/vocab/
For more about foods and goods:

http://www.drlemon.net/Grammar/food/Food.html
For the full article on fish and chips:

http://www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fish_and_chips
For more about money denominations:

http://www.moneyinstructor.com/vocabulary.asp
For more practice with furniture and appliances:

http://web2.uvcs.uvic.ca/courses/elc/studyzone/200/vocab/furn.htm
http://iteslj.org/v/ei/furniture.html

ENGLISH
Unit 4
SPECIAL HOLIDAYS
Objectives:
Recognize and use ordinal numbers, days of the week and months
of the year in order to communicate ideas about age, holidays
and the most frequent activities carried out during holidays.
Engage in lively conversations in order to tell age, place/date of
birth and general personal information as well as to describe
national and international holidays and the most frequent
activities carried out during these holidays.
Unit 4
Special
holidays
Listening Grammar
Speaking Vocabulary
Writing

National Dates Ordinal Birthdays International
holidays months numbers froms 1 holidays
days to 31
years
Unit Guidelines
In this unit you will learn how to use ordinal numbers, the days of the week and months of the year. Besides that, you’ll talk
about different local holidays and what activities are carried out on those special dates. In addition, you’ll know how to ask about
people’s birthdays, what they usually do on that special day, as well as when and where they were born. Finally, you’ll learn about
some of the most important or common international holidays and what people usually do at those festivities.

In this unit you will work on the third project called “My hometown festivals”. You will write a report on all the
festivals and activities which are carried out in your hometown. The report should include details, such as names and
dates of the celebrations, locations, descriptions of the activities, typical food that is eaten, and more. You will want
to open by stating the name of your city or town and a brief description of it. Some of the holidays that you include in
the report may be local, others national, and some that are celebrated on an international level. This project is going
to be beneficial to you because you will be able to talk about your hometown and national traditions and customs to
others in English.

Unit Four Lesson 1
What is your favorite holiday?
Getting started!
¿Cuáles son los días festivos más comunes en
El Salvador?
¿Cómo se dicen las diferentes festividades más
comunes en Inglés?
¿Cómo celebran las fiestas patronales en tu lugar
de origen?
¿Que hacen las personas en esos días festivos?
I can read and recognize dates of holidays and events in calendars, I can clearly distinguish and apply the rising and falling intonation
magazines and newspaper articles. of questions.
I can tell the dates of birthdays, holidays and important events with
adequate word order.
Which of the following are names of holidays?

1. Mother’s Day 2. Festival 3. Father’s Day 4. Celebration 5. Independence Day 6. Presents

Listen to and read the following conversation and identify the B: Not at all. You are my best friend, and I consider you part
holiday that they are speaking about. Look up any new words of my family too.
in a dictionary. A: Okay. I’ll go home and pick up my stuff.
B: That’s perfect. Hurry up! I will wait for you right here.
A: Hi, Jennifer. Where are you going? A: Thanks a lot.
B: Hi, Carlos. I am going to the beach with my family
because today is Mother’s Day.
A: Oh. Thanks for reminding me about it. Do you celebrate
this special day with your family?
B: Of course. It’s a family tradition to go to the beach, and at
Activity 1
night we have a family dinner. We usually give presents to Answer the following questions.
my mother and ask her to open them. How about you?
A: Well, my mother is living in Canada now. I usually call 1. Where is Jennifer going?
her early in the morning to congratulate her and tell her 2. What is she celebrating?
how much I love and miss her. We talk for about two 3. Where is Carlos’s mother?
hours. 4. Does he miss her a lot?
B: Hey! I have an idea. Why don’t you come with us?
5. Does Carlos accept Jennifer’s invitation?
A: Really? Are you kidding me?
Glossary: Pick up my stuff: get my personal things.

Reminding me: make me remember something.
Presents: gifts or souvenirs.

UNIT 4

Holidays in El Salvador
The word holiday is a contraction of the words “holy” and
“day”. Originally it meant a special religious day. Now the
meaning has changed. It means every special day of rest, and
there are different categories.
There are many holidays throughout the year and the some
dates vary from year to year. Here is a list of the most common
celebrated holidays in El Salvador.
Fiestas Agostinas Independence Day
Valentine’s Day Mother’s Day
New Year’s Day Christmas Eve
Activity 2
Holy Week Father’s Day
Choose the word that best completes each statement.
1. Mother’s Day is a holiday celebrated in El Salvador
that honors mothers and (motherhood/moms).
2. Traditionally on this day mothers receive a (bouquet

collection) of flowers, a gift, a greeting card, or a
combination of these things.
3. Mother’s Day is the most popular day to eat

(outside/ out) in a restaurant. Taking one’s mother
Labor Day Teacher’s Day out to a restaurant (senses/seems) to be a very
popular present.
4. Father’s Day is a (relatively/relative) recent holiday.

On this day fathers typically receive (masculine/
muscular) gifts such as electronics and tools, as well
as greeting cards.
Day of the Race Day of the Dead

UNIT 4
Time to read
Listen to and read the following reading passages about
some common holidays and feasts in El Salvador. Look
Independence Day is celebrated at a national level at

public and private schools, as well as military bases. Each
city organizes a parade with the students’ participation.
They march and represent their respective schools with
the bands and groups of cheerleaders. Each group bears
the flag of El Salvador and their school flag. Special
ceremonies are also held at the Plaza Libertad, located
in downtown San Salvador, with the participation of the
President of El Salvador accompanied by his cabinet
members to address a patriotic message to the nation.
Christmas in El Salvador is celebrated with a family

gathering at a traditional dinner to commemorate the
birth of Jesus. Dinner is generally served after the entire
family attends Mass (Misa del Gallo) on Christmas Eve
at midnight. Dinner usually consists of oven roasted
turkey, chicken, rice, potato salad, and fresh salad. Special
drinks are served. Fruit juices are commonly served
to kids and of course the typical Horchata is always
included. Children celebrate Christmas with firecrackers
and fireworks while they wait for Santa Claus´ arrival
with toys.
The country’s most important festival is Fiestas

Agostinas. Religious, recreational and trade activities are
carried out that usually last an entire week. The principal
Activity 3
attraction is the traditional procession of the patron saint, Answer the following questions.
the Savior of the World, in a parade down the principal
streets of downtown San Salvador. It represents the 1. On which holiday do people go to the cemetery?
transfiguration of Jesus Christ.
The Day of the Dead, also known as All Souls Day, is a 2. On which holiday do students bear the flag of
celebration that takes place in the entire country. It is El Salvador with their school flag?
customary to go to the cemetery, pray and place flowers
on the tombs of deceased loved ones. One can place 3. On which holiday do families gather for dinner to
wreaths of natural or paper flowers. It is also traditional to commemorate the birth of Jesus?
place cypress leaf wreaths for their pleasant aroma. The
food usually consumed during this time of year is tamales
(chicken or pork, sweet or salty) and sliced pumpkin 4. Where are special ceremonies held on
cooked with brown sugar. This dessert is called Independence Day in San Salvador?
“ayote en miel”.
5. How do children celebrate Christmas?
Glossary: Bear: to carry.

Parades: a march. Wreaths: circlets or crowns.

UNIT 4

Listen to and read the following conversation between a
Activity 4
mother and her children carefully and then repeat it out
loud. Look up any new words in a dictionary. Answer the following questions.
1. What holiday is this conversation about?
A: Well, Christmas is almost here. So, Carlos, what do
A. Christmas
you want from Santa this year?
B: A toy car and some Transformers. B. Mother’s Day
A: Really? And what about you, Andrea? What do C. Father’s Day
you want for Christmas?
C: If I can’t have a Barbie or a Bratz doll, um, I would
like to have some makeup and accessories. And if I 2. What does Carlos want?
can’t have some accessories, it doesn’t really matter A. some Transformers
what I get. B. some electric trains
A: Wow. Well, I’m excited that Santa is coming. And
how is Santa going to get inside the house, Carlos? C. some clothes
B: Um, he will go inside through the door or windows.
A: Should we prepare anything for Santa? 3. What does Andrea want?
B: Yeah!
A some dolls and make up
A: What are we going to prepare for him, Andrea?
C: Um. We could prepare some cookies for him and B. some dolls and a toy house
some hot chocolate, and, um, we could give his C. some money
reindeer, um, some hot chocolate in bowls and
some cookies.
A: Well, what do you think? The reindeer probably 4. What are they going to prepare for Santa?
don’t eat cookies, but what else could we give A. some hot coffee and cookies
them, Carlos? B. some hot milk and cookies
B: Um, apples.
A: Ah, that’s good. And . . . C. some hot chocolate and cookies
B: Oranges and bananas.
A: Okay and what time do you think we should
go to bed? Don’t forget!
C: At about eight.
A: About eight o’clock. I’m really happy that
Christmas is coming. Many holidays in El Salvador are religious. Towns
and villages hold festivals for their patron saints, while
Christian and public holidays are celebrated nationally.
Hands on! 3A
To begin the project, brainstorm and make a list of all

festivals and holidays that are celebrated in your hometown.
Be sure to include those that are celebrated on a national
level, like Independence Day, and those festivals that are
unique and one of a kind to where you live.
Glossary:
Reindeer: the animals that pull Santa’s sleigh.

UNIT 4

Salvadoran typical food
Some information about typical Salvadoran cuisine is
presented here. Some of these dishes are eaten during
special holidays or seasons and others are eaten year
round. Have you tried many of these foods and drinks?
Corn hojuelas with honey is a food that is eaten during

the celebration of All Souls Day. This is the day that
people bring flowers to the cemetery to put on the
graves of the deceased. Coyoles with honey and torrejas
(French toast) with syrup are seasonal dishes eaten
during Holy Week or Easter.
Pork or chicken tamales, fried yuca with and pasteles

(corn patties that are fried and stuffed with beef and
vegetables) make excellent weekend dishes. Pupusas are
known internationally as a Salvadoran cuisine and are
made of corn or rice flour filled with pork (chicharrón),
Activity 6
cheese or fried beans (or a combination of everything). Answer the following questions with your own information.
Of course, Salvadorans cannot do without fried
plantains, refried beans or casamiento (a mixture of 1. What is your favorite holiday?
beans with rice and herbs). This is a typical meal that
2. What traditional food do you eat on that holiday?
Salvadoran people eat every day. Semita, quesadilla,
alboroto, chilate with nuégados and buñuelos are some 3. What is your favorite traditional food?
of the many delicious examples of excellent desserts.
Fresh corn tamales, riguas (corn cakes) and baby corn
atole are snacks in the afternoon. What for?
Chicha is a popular drink prepared with fermented The typical foods in El Salvador are probably some of
pineapple peel, cashew and nance fruit. Chuco is a very the best foods that anyone can taste! The food that is
special Salvadoran dish that is drunk during the early most identified with Salvadorans are pupusas. You can
morning hours. find them anywhere you go. There are other typical
foods from El Salvador, like chilate, nuegados, yucca, atol
de elote, tamales (from pork, chicken, beef) and chuco.
5 Activity
Match the descriptions with the corresponding names of foods or drinks.

Food or drinks Descriptions
1 pupusas A It is a very special Salvadoran dish made of corn that is drunk
during the early morning hours.
2 casamiento B It is a mixture of beans with rice and herbs.
3 chicha C They are made of corn or rice flour filled with pork (chicharrón),
cheese or fried beans (or a combinationof everything).
4 chuco D It is a popular drink prepared with fermented pineapple peel,
cashew and nance fruit.
5 pasteles E They are corn patties that are fried and stuffed with beef
and vegetables.

UNIT 4
Language in use
Asking for or talking about special Salvadoran holidays
To ask for any special holiday you can use the following question forms:
Questions Possible answers
What is your favorite holiday? It’s Christmas.
What’s is the main holiday in San Salvador? It’s called Fiestas Agostinas.
What is special about that day? People exchange presents.
What kind of food do you eat on that holiday? Torrejas and hojuelas with honey.
When is Mother’s Day celebrated? It’s in May.
To ask for or about special holidays in English you can use two kinds of questions: Yes/No questions and information
questions. When asking and using these kinds of questions you have to be careful about providing the correct pattern
of intonation:
A. Yes/No questions are used or expressed with a B. Information questions are used or expressed with a
rising intonation at the end. falling intonation at the end.
Listen to and practice the following intonation pattern. Listen to and practice the following intonation pattern.
Rising Intonation Falling Intonation

Is Mother’s Day your favorite holiday? What is your favorite holiday?
Is that a special day in your hometown? What do you usually do on Mother’s Day?
Is your family together on Christmas? What is your favorite traditional food?
7 Activity
Choose whether the following questions have rising or falling intonation. Then listen to and repeat the questions.
Questions Rising Falling
Is your family together on Christmas?
What is your favorite traditional holiday?
What is the main holiday in your hometown?
Do you celebrate Father’s Day?
When is Labor Day?
Is Holy Week celebrated is March?
What does your family do on All Souls Day?
Is Independence Day celebrated in our hometown?

UNIT 4
Choose the word that best completes each statement.
Listen to and repeat the following questions, and then
1. Valentine’s Day is a holiday that celebrates (romance/ answer them with your own information.
romantic). It is a day when lovers express their feelings
for each other, often by exchanging gifts. 1. Is Christmas your favorite holiday?
2. Chocolate, flowers, and jewelry are all (typical/
2. Is this a special day in your hometown?
topical) Valentine’s Day presents. 3. Is your family together on Mother’s Day?
3. The most traditional gift on this day is a Valentine’s 4. Do you celebrate the Day of the Cross?
Day (card/note), which has a written message saying 5. When is the Day of the Race?
how much someone means to you. 6. Is Labor Day in October?
4. Other modern symbols are the heart-shaped outline,
7. What does your family do on All Souls Day?
shape of a heart, and the figure of Cupid usually
shown shooting his bow to (make/inspire) love. 8. Is Independence Day celebrated in your hometown?
5. Many couples go out on romantic (dates/meetings)
on Valentine’s Day.
6. An example of the above is a (candlelit/ candle-
burning) dinner in a romantic restaurant.
Activity 10
7. When a boy asks you to be his “valentine”, he wants Answer the following question with your own information.
you to simply (except/accept) the fact that he likes
you. Sometimes this can also mean that he wants to What do people usually eat and drink in your
(make/spend) time with you on Valentine’s Day. hometown for the following events?
8. A (sweetheart/sweet-tooth) is a slightly outdated
term meaning “the one I love”. A. Christmas Day
9. If you’re buying your loved one a (dozen/twelve) B. Mother’s Day
roses, it means you’re buying him or her 12 roses. C. Father’s Day
10. Wow! What a beautiful (bucket/bouquet)! D. New Year’s Eve
Lesson core
Conociste los diferentes días festivos que la mayoría de los salvadoreños y las
salvadoreñas celebran ya sea entre amigos o con la familia. Además, conociste
algunos platos tradicionales que las personas comen o preparan para vender o
compartir con los demás. Finalmente, conociste y practicaste dos patrones de
entonación utilizados por los hablantes nativos del idioma Inglés.

UNIT 4
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following is not an

example of a holiday? 3 On which holiday do most
Salvadorans go to the cemetery and
eat hojuelas?
a) Mother’s Day
b) Celebration a) Valentine’s Day
c) Christmas b) All Souls Day
d) New Year’s Day c) Labor Day
d) Independence Day

example of traditional Salvadoran food
eaten on holidays?
4 Which of the following are not
examples of traditional Salvadoran
holidays?
a) torrejas a) Saint Patrick’s Day
b) pizza b) Mother’s Day
c) tamales c) Thanksgiving Day
d) hojuelas d) All Souls Day
4. a, c 3. b 2. b 1. b Answers:
RELIGIOUS HOLIDAYS
Most holidays are linked to faiths and religions.

Christian holidays are defined as part of the
liturgical year.
In El Salvador, the Catholic patronal feast days or
“name days” are celebrated in each city or town,
according to the calendar of saints. However,
in Islam, the largest celebrated holidays are Eid
and Ramadan. Hindus, Jains and Sikhs observe
several holidays, one of the largest being
Diwali (the Festival of Light). As a final example,
Japanese holidays contain references to several
different faiths and beliefs.

Unit Four Lesson 2
What’s the date today?
Getting started!
C
¿ ómo se dicen los días de la semana en Inglés?
¿Cuáles son los meses del año?
¿Cómo se escriben las fechas en Inglés?
I can write the days of the week and months of the year with accurate spelling. I can identify the correct day of the week from a list of dates in
conversation and diverse oral input.
I can accurately pronounce the days of the week and months of the year.
Which words are names of months? Which are days of the week?
1. Monday 2. February 3. Friday 4. December 5.Tuesday 6. November 7. Friday

identify the months of the year that are mentioned. Look
A: Hey! When is Labor Day?
B: It’s in May. And it is a vacation day.
A: But what does Labor Day mean?
B: It is a day of rest and almost everyone has that day
off of work.
A: What do you usually do on that day?
B: I usually stay home in the morning.
A: And what do you do in the afternoon?
B: Well, I enjoy having lunch with my family. How
about you?
A: Oh, I go to the beach with my family and don’t
come back until four or five in the evening.
B: Is there any other day of rest in May?
A: Of course, one of the most important holidays in
El Salvador!
Activity 1
B: I know. It’s Mother’s Day!
A: You’re right. How do you celebrate it?
Answer the following questions.
B: My family usually has a barbecue or a formal dinner. 1. What holidays are they talking about?
A: Oh! That is really nice. We almost do the same. We
like to get together and celebrate with the 2. When are these holidays celebrated?
entire family. 3. What do they do on these special days?

UNIT 4
There are twelve months in a year which can be grouped

Enrich your vocabulary or divided into four quarters and two semesters. The
calendar which is used today still keeps the names of the
Days of the week and months of the year months that are Latin named after Roman Gods.
There are seven days in a week. The weekdays include Listen to and repeat each month out loud carefully.
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. The
weekend includes Saturday and Sunday. Months of the year Abbreviation
Listen to and repeat each day and its abbreviation out
loud carefully. January Jan
February Feb
Days of the week Abbreviation March Mar
Monday Mon. April Apr
Tuesday Tue. May ----
Wednesday Wed. June ----
Thursday Thurs. July ----
Friday Fri. August Aug
Saturday Sat. September Sept
Sunday Sun. October Oct
November Nov
December Dec
Activity 2
Complete the following statements with the month of the year.
1. The first month of the year is __.
2. The month after __ is July.
3. The last month of the year is __.
4. The month before May is __.
5. October is before __.
6. __ is before April.
7. __ is after July.
8. The month with the least days is __.
9. The sixth month of the year is __.
10. The month of the year between March and May is __.
11. The month of the year before November is__.
Activity 3
1. Which is your favorite day of the week? Why?
2. Do you like the weekends? Why?
3. Which day of the week do you dislike? Why?
Glossary: Resolutions: declarations or decisions.

Eve: evening before. Accomplish: achieve or complete.
Count down: count backward from 10 to zero.

UNIT 4
Time to read
Listen to and read the following article about New Year’s
Activity 4
Eve carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
Choose the letter or letters that best answer the following questions.
1. When is New Year’s Day?
A. December 31st
B. January 31st
C. January 1st
2. When is New Year’s Eve?

A. January 15th
B. December 31st
C. December 1st
3. What do people do on New Year’s Day?

A. People often make new promises.
New Year’s Day is on January 1st. It is the day when B. People go to the movies.
people celebrate the beginning of a new year. On New C. People eat chicken.
Year’s Eve, which is December 31st, family and friends
often get together for dinner or have a party to welcome
in the new year. People often count down the hours, 4. What do people do on New Year’s Eve?
minutes, and seconds before the new year arrives at A. Families and friends often get together for dinner.
midnight, and they sometimes set off fireworks or play
loud music. New Year’s Day is a time of new beginnings, B. Families go to sleep early.
so people often make new year’s resolutions--promises or C. Families do not eat together.
goals they hope to accomplish during the coming year.
Such resolutions often include losing weight, getting in
5. What does the new year provide for people?
shape, or eating healthy. Other resolutions might deal
with improving one’s relationship with a family member A. opportunities to change and improve their lives
or friend. Sometimes these resolutions are short lived, B. opportunities to stay home
that is, people don’t follow through with their plans. C. opportunities to meet people
However, the new year gives people opportunities to
change and improve their lives.
Don’t forget! Activity 5

Write an original description of what you usually do on
Salvadorans stay up on December 31st until 12 a.m. Christmas Eve and New Year’s Eve.
to welcome the New Year the same way as Christmas.
You can hear the deafening sounds of the firecrackers
on both days all over the country.

UNIT 4

Listen to and read the following short conversation about
Activity 7
the Day of the Cross carefully. Look up any new words in Choose the letter that best answers each question.
a dictionary.
1. When is this holiday celebrated?
A: What is the Day of the Cross? A. May 3rd
B: The Day of the Cross is celebrated on _(1)_ 3rd. B. May 1st
It is common belief that this celebration was C. May 5th
created by the _(2)_ in honor of the God of Rain.
This purpose of this celebration was to beg the
2. Who introduced the cross?
heavens for rain. But later the _(3)_ introduced the
adoration of the_( 4)_ instead of the God of Rain. A. Indians
Each family decorates a cross with fresh flowers, _ B. Spaniards
(5)_ fruits and other ornaments made out of _(6)_. C. Americans
Family members and visitors stand in front of the
cross, make the _(7)_ of the cross and pray. They 3. What is “adorar la cruz”?
then ask for permission to take a piece of fruit. This A. People make the sign of the cross and pray.
act is called “_(8)_ la cruz” in Spanish. B. People get a piece of fruit.
C. People stand in front of the cross and take a piece
of fruit.
4. What do people use to decorate the cross?

A. fresh vegetables and tortillas
B. fresh flowers and tropical fruits
C. fresh flowers and tropical vegetables
Activity 8
6 Activity Answer the following questions with your own information.
1. Is this holiday celebrated in your hometown?
2. What do people usually do on this day?
Listen to the conversation again about the Day of the
Cross and complete it by using the words provided below. 3. How do people decorate the crosses?
4. Do you know any other holiday that is similar to this?
adorar sign Indians paper
tropical cross May Spaniards
Hands on! 3B
What for?
Take a little more time to double check your list
May 3rd marks the beginning of the rainy season and the of holidays and festivals. Go through the months
Day of the Cross, the festival that mixes Christianity with of the year one by one. Are you forgetting any? It
indigenous fertility rites. People plant a cross in their yard might be helpful to you to make a table similar to
and decorate it with flowers, fruit and garland in hope of a the one in Activity 11.
good growing season and good luck.
Glossary: Ornaments: decorations.

Beliefs: ideas and values. Instead of: an alternative or substitute.

UNIT 4
Match the pictures with their corresponding holidays. Write the dates on which the following holidays take place.
1.
A. Mother’s Day
B. Father’s Day
C. Day of the Cross
D. Labor Day
2. 1. Christmas 4. Independence Day

E. Holy Week
3. 2. Valentine’s Day 5. All Souls Day
4. 5.
3. Fiestas Agostinas 6. Teacher’s Day
Activity 11
Investigate and make a list of all holidays and their dates
which take place in El Salvador. Also include a list of activities
which are practiced during these times. Use the following table
to report your information.
Don’t forget!
Holiday Date Activities
In every month of the year one or more fixed holidays
are celebrated in El Salvador. The only holy day which
varies its celebration date is Easter. It is celebrated
either in March or in April.

UNIT 4
Language in use
There are several ways to write dates in English.
In American English, the month is usually put before the
Activity 13
day. If you wish, you can put the definite article before the
day. It is common to write a comma before the year. Answer the following questions by writing the correct dates.
Example: October (the) 5(th), 2004 1. When did El Salvador gain its independence?
You can also write the date by using numbers only. There
are two common forms.
Examples: 5/10/04 or 5-10-04
Note, however, that 5/10/04 usually means 5 October

2004 in British English or Spanish and May 10, 2004 in
American English. To avoid any possible confusion, you
should spell out the month or use the abbreviation.
Also note that the months and days of the week are
always capitalized in English. If you don’t want to write
the words, you can use the abbreviations. 2. When was America discovered by
Christopher Columbus?
3. When were the Peace Accords signed in El Salvador?
Fiestas Agostinas
12 Activity
Write down the date in the way you would write it (e.g. in
letters). Keep in mind that some words need to be capitalized.
What is the date? 4. When were the last two major earthquakes in
El Salvador?
Example: 1/15/09 (month/day/year)
Answer: It’s January 15, 2009.
1. 1/1/08
2. 2/14/09
3. 5/10/08
4. 6/22/01
5. 12/31/09

UNIT 4
Unscramble the following words and rewrite them.
Match the name of each month to the following statements.
1. onmyad
January February March April 2. dayfri
May June July August 3. unsyad
September October November December 4. prail
5. ujen
1. This month is named after the Roman Emperor 6. yam
Julius Caesar. 7. fearybur
2. This month is named after the Roman war god
8. utedays
Mars.
9. bernovme
3. Before Julius Caesar decided that the year should
begin in January (not March), this had been the 10. gustau
seventh month of the year. (The Latin word for
seven is septem.)
4. This used to be the tenth month of the year. (The
Latin word for ten is decem.) Activity 16
5. This month is named after the Roman god Janus.
6. This used to be the eighth month of the year Answer the following questions with your own information.
(eight = octo). 1. What is your favorite day of the week?
7. The name of this month stands for the opening of 2. What is your favorite month of the year?
the buds in spring (to open = aperire). 3. What is today’s date?
8. This month is named after the Roman
Emperor Augustus.
9. This month is named after the Roman mother
goddess Maia. Lesson core
10. This month is named after the Roman Festival
of Februa. Conociste como se escriben y pronuncian los días
11. In the old Roman calendar this used to be the de la semana así como los meses del año en Inglés.
ninth month (nine = novem). También, practicaste como escribir las fechas en
diferentes formas en Inglés y como preguntar a
12. This month is named after the Roman goddess
otras personas acerca de sus días de la semana y
Juno, Jupiter’s wife. meses favoritos del año. Además, leíste acerca de
las fechas especiales y actividades que se llevan a
cabo en el mes de diciembre. Finalmente tuviste
acceso a conocer el origen de los nombres de los
días de la semana y los meses del año.
Don’t forget!
Salvadorans write dates in the following way: day/month/

year. Neither months nor days of the week are capitalized
in Spanish. For example, lunes 15 de octubre de 2010.

UNIT 4
Self evaluation

1 Which of the following is not a day

of the week? 3 Which of the following dates is
correctly written?
a) Monday a) may, 10 2010
b) Saturday b) 10 may, 2010
c) June c) 2010, May 10
d) Monday d) May 10, 2009
2 Which of the following is not a

month of the year? 4 When did El Salvador gain its
independence?
a) February a) September 15, 1821
b) April b) 15/09/1821
c) Tuesday c) 1821/15/19
d) December d) 15 September, 2009
4.a 3.d 2. c 1. c Answers:
MOTHER’S DAY
Mother’s Day is celebrated on different days

throughout the world.
In El Salvador, Mexico and Guatemala it
is celebrated on May 10th. In the U.S. it is
celebrated on the second Sunday in May. In
some others countries it is celebrated either on
the first, second , third or last Sunday in May.
The extent of the celebrations varies greatly.
In some countries it is potentially offensive to
one’s mother not to have a big celebration on
Mother’s Day. In others it is barely celebrated.

Unit Four Lesson 3
Where is the party?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son y cómo se dicen los números ordinales FIRST SIXTH
en Inglés?
SECOND SEVENTH
¿Cómo se dice la nomenclatura de las calles y
avenidas en Inglés? THIRD EIGHTH
¿Cómo se dicen las fechas en forma oral en Inglés? FOURTH NINTH
FIFTH TENTH
I can say the ordinal numbers in the correct sequence up to 31st. I can give the right pronunciation to the ending of the ordinal numbers.
I can say the dates of holidays and important events with adequate I can ask and tell names of streets with the correct use of ordinal numbers.
word order and correct use of the prepositions in and on.
Which of the following are ordinal numbers?
A.21st B. 2 C. 3rd D. 4 E. 5th F. 6 G. 7th H.8 I.9th J.10

and identify the ordinal numbers. Look up any new
A: Hi, Suzan. How’s everything?

B: Hello, Jessica. I’m pretty good. How about you?
A: I am okay. By the way, do you know when our
Christmas party is?
B: Yeah! It is on Monday the twenty-first in the evening.
A: Hey. That sounds perfect because it is my day off.
B: What a coincidence! I will be on vacation too.
A: Where is the party? Is it far or near?
B: It’s at the Great Carnival Hall.
A: Do you know the address?
B: Yes, it’s on 25th Avenue North, near Metrocentro.
Activity 1
A: What are you wearing for the party? Answer the following questions.
B: I’m going to wear a long, black dress and a pair of
high heels. How about you? 1. When is the Christmas party?
A: I’m going to wear a light pink blouse and a long,
2. Where is the Christmas party?
black skirt.
B: We could meet at 7 p.m. and go to the party together. 3. What time will they meet?
A: That’s a nice idea! I will give you a call then.

UNIT 4

Ordinal numbers are used to tell position or order.
Activity 2
These are first, second, third, fourth, and so on. Ordinal Answer the following questions.
numbers are usually used to describe what position
something has. For example, February is the second 1. What is the first month of the year?
month of the year. Ordinal numbers are also used to
give dates: May 23, 2000 is pronounced May twenty- 2. What is the seventh month?
third, two thousand. Ordinal numbers are usually used 3. What is the twelfth month?
to tell the names or numbers of streets and avenues. For
example: It’s between First Avenue and Fifth Street. 4. What is the tenth month?
5. What is the third month?
Listen to and repeat each ordinal number out loud.
6. What is the sixth month?
1st first 17th seventeenth 7. What is the eleventh month?
2nd second 18th eighteenth 8. What is the second month?
3rd third 19th nineteenth 9. What is the fifth month?
4th fourth 20th twentieth
10. What is the eighth month?
5th fifth 21st twenty-first
11. What is the ninth month?
6th sixth 22nd twenty-second
7th seventh 23rd twenty-third 12. What is the fourth month?
8th eighth 24th twenty-fourth

9th ninth 25th twenty-fifth
10th
11th
tenth
eleventh
26th
27th
twenty-sixth
twenty-seventh
Activity 3
12th twelfth 28th twenty-eighth Match the numbers with their written forms.
13th thirteenth 29th twenty-ninth
14th fourteenth 30th thirtieth 1 1st A eleventh
15th fifteenth 31st thirty-first 2 20th B first
16th sixteenth 3 19th C thirty-first
4 3rd D fifteenth
5 31st E twentieth
6 15th F third
7 11th G nineteenth

UNIT 4
Time to read
Activity 4
Holy Week (Easter) 1. Easter or Holy Week is celebrated only in March.
Easter or Holy Week is celebrated for a week once a year in 2. Ninety percent of the Salvadoran population is
the month of March or April. The dates vary every year. It is considered to be Catholic.
celebrated throughout the country since Roman Catholics
are predominant in El Salvador. At least sixty percent of 3. Salvadorans celebrate Holy Week after Resurrection
the population is considered to be Catholic. Sunday or Easter Sunday.
Salvadorans celebrate Holy Week before Resurrection 4. Sonsonate is the fourteenth most important city in
Sunday or Easter Sunday. Processions are held El Salvador.
everywhere in the country with images of Jesus carrying 5. The Holy Week tradition of making rugs on the
the cross. Daily religious services are carried out. A place streets attracts visitors from all over the country.
of interest is in Sonsonate, El Salvador’s fourth most
important city. It is well known for its rugs made of 6. Lent is kept by consuming meat on Fridays but
colorful flowers and colored sawdust or salt. Pictures or not seafood .
images are created on the streets of the procession. This 7. Easter Sunday is celebrated with a special mass and
Holy Week tradition attracts visitors from all over a procession.
the country.
Lent is the forty days that lead up to Easter Sunday.

During this time, people make sacrifices to God. One
way they do this is by not eating meat on Fridays but
seafood instead. Some of the most popular food eaten
Activity 5
during Holy Week is fish soup or seafood soup, rice with
clams accompanied with hot tortillas made from corn Choose the letter that best answers each question.
flour, plantain or mango marmalade, dried fruit candy
and French toast with sugar cane honey (panela) 1. When is Eastern celebrated in El Salvador?
called torrejas. A. in May or April
B. in March or April
To end the week, Easter Sunday is celebrated with a
special mass and a procession.
2. What are some of the most popular food eaten
during Holy Week?
A. seafood soup and dry fruit candy
B. pupusas and tamales
3. What things are created on the street of the procession?

A. rugs made of colorful flowers and colored sawdust
B. rugs made of colorful paintings and fruits
4. What day is celebrated to end Holy Week?

A. Palm Sunday
B. Easter Sunday
Glossary: Lent: a period of time for preparation of the believer.

Predominant: principal or majority.
Sawdust: the dust taken from sawing the wood.

UNIT 4

Listen to and read the following conversation about a
hotel room reservation carefully. Look up any new words
in a dictionary.
A: Hello. Entre Pinos Mountain Hotel. May I

help you?
B: Yes, I’d like to reserve a room for three on the 10th
of May.
A: Okay. Let me check our books here for a moment.
The 10th of March, right?
B: No. May, not March.
A: Oh, sorry. Let me see here. Hmmm.
B: Are you all booked that night?
A: Well, we do have one double room available,
complete with a kitchen and a jacuzzi bath. And
the view of the mountains is great, too.
Activity 6
B: How much is that? Choose the letter that best answers each question.
A: It’s only $125, plus a 13% room tax.
B: Oh, that’s a little too expensive for me. Do you 1. Which date does the man make a reservation for?
have a cheaper room available either on the 19th or A. Mary 20th
the 22nd? B. May 21st
A: Well, would you like a single or double room? C. May 22nd
B: A double room, please.
A: Okay, we do have a few rooms available on the
19th. We’re full on the 22nd, unless you want a 2. What kind of room does the man prefer?
single room. A. a single room
B: Well, how much is the single room on the 22nd? B. a double room
A: $50, plus the 13% room tax. C. either one is okay
B: Okay, that’ll be fine.
A: All right. Could I have your name, please?
3. Why doesn’t he want to reserve the double room?
B: Yes. Ronald Martinez.
A: How do you spell your last name, Mr. Martinez? A. It doesn’t have a nice view.
B: M- A-R-T-I-N-E-Z. B. It doesn’t come with a Jacuzzi bath.
A: Okay, Mr. Martinez, we look forward to seeing you C. It’s too expensive.
on May 22nd.
B: Okay. Goodbye. 4. How much is the single room?
A. 50 dollars plus 13% tax
B. 60 dollars plus 13% tax
C. 55 dollars plus 13% tax
5. How do you spell the man’s name?

A. Roland
B. Orlando
C. Ronald

UNIT 4

A. There are several ways to say or express the dates
in English.
Activity 8
Written:
12/13/2008 Write the dates in words to the following special holidays.
12/13/08
Spoken: 1. New Year’s Day 6. Teachers’ Day
1. December the thirteenth, two thousand (and) eight 2. Valentine’s Day 7. Independence Day
2. the thirteenth of December, two thousand (and) eight 3. Labor Day 8. Day of the Race
B. There are several ways to say or express the years in English. 4. Mother’s Day 9. All Souls Day
5. Father’s Day 10. Christmas Day
1. From 2000 onwards, years are pronounced like
ordinary cardinal numbers.
Examples:
2000 - two thousand
2009 - two thousand and nine
2. Earlier years are pronounced differently: the first

two figures are a number and the last two figures are
a number.
They can be joined by hundred, which is only necessary, if
the last two figures are 00 through 09.
1999 - nineteen (hundred and) ninety-nine
1806 - eighteen hundred and six / eighteen oh six
7 Activity
Match the written with the spoken date forms of the

following dates.
1 12/25/1986 A December the thirty-first,

two thousand nine
2 06/17/2008 B February the fourteenth,
nineteen ninety-nine
3 10/12/2000 C October the twelfth, two
thousand
4 02/14/1999 D June the seventeenth, two
thousand eight
5 12/31/2009 E December the twenty-fifth,
nineteen eighty-six Hands on! 3C
To continue the project, make your list or table more

complete. On which dates are these festivals and holidays
celebrated? When and where are they celebrated, in the
street or in a church? At sunrise, all day, at night?

UNIT 4
Language in use
Prepositions of time: at on and in
We use:
at- for a precise time
in- for months, years, centuries and long periods
on- for days and dates.
Read and study the following table of prepositions of time.
At- for precise time In- for months, years, centuries and long periods On- for days and dates
at 3 o’clock in May on Sunday
at 10:30 a.m. in summer on Tuesdays
at noon in the summer on 6 March
at dinnertime in 1990 on 25 Dec. 2010
at bedtime in the 1990s on Christmas Day
at sunrise in the next century on Independence Day
at sunset in the ice age on my birthday
at the moment in the past/future on New Year’s Eve
Study the following examples of sentences using Notice the use of the prepositions of time in and on in
prepositions of time. these common expressions:
1. I have a meeting at 9 a.m. in on
2. The shop closes at midnight. in the morning on Tuesday morning
3. Jaime went home at lunchtime.
in the mornings on Saturday mornings
4. In England, it often snows in December.
5. Do you think we will live on the moon in the future? in the afternoon(s) on Sunday afternoons
6. There should be a lot of progress in the next century. in the evening(s) on Monday evening
7. Do you work on Mondays?
8. Her birthday is on November 20th.
9. Where will you be on New Year’s Day?
9 Activity
Choose the letter that best answers completes each statement.

1. Let’s meet __ six o’clock. 5. We do not get up early __ the morning on holidays.
A. in A. in
B. on B. on
C. at C. at
2. She’ll be at work __ Friday. 6. We will play __ Saturday afternoon.
A. in A. in
B. on B. on
C. at C. at
3. We’ll meet __ Christmas day. 7. They have classes __ the mornings.
A. in A. in
B. on B. on
C. at C. at
4. I love to go shopping __ Christmas time. 8. You will travel to La Union __ December.
A. in A. in
B. on B. on
C. at C. at

UNIT 4
Choose the letter that best complements each statement. Choose the preposition that best completes each statement.
1. The ordinal number for one is __. 1. You can see the stars (at/in/on) night. Well, if the sky
A. 1th is clear.
B. 1nd
C. 1st 2. In El Salvador, you start primary school (at/in/on)
the age of six.
2. The ordinal number for two is __.
A. 2st 3. I often work until 11 p.m. I go to bed (at/in/on)
B. 2nd midnight.
C. 2rd
4. I hate waking up very early (at/in/on) the morning.
3. The ordinal number for 3 is __.
A. 3rd 5. He is working at a TV studio. He is very busy
B. 3th
(at/in/on) the moment.
C. 3nd

4. The ordinal number for 8 is __.
6. The course ends (at/in/on) January 8th.
A. 8st
B. 8th 7. We have to go (at/in/on) a few minutes. Our boss is
waiting for us.
C. eightnth
5. The ordinal number for thirty-one is __. 8. We are getting married (at/in/on) November.
A. 31th
B. 31st 9. She usually goes for walks in the country
C. 31nd (at/in/on) Saturday mornings.
6. The ordinal number between nineteenth and 10. He visits his mother (at/in/on) Christmas.
twenty-first is__.
A. 20th
B. 20ty Lesson core
C. 20st
Conociste los números ordinales del primero al

11 Activity trigésimo primero, así mismo la pronunciación y
escritura de cada uno de estos números en ingles.
Practicaste como decir las fechas utilizando el
orden correcto de los elementos que la componen:
Listen to and repeat the following questions, and then día, mes y año siguiendo el patrón Americano.
answer them with your own information. Además, estudiaste el uso correcto de algunas
preposiciones de tiempo para expresar periodos de
1. What is your address? tiempo y fechas. Finalmente, aprendiste a decir los
2. Where do you go on vacation or holidays? números y nombres de avenidas y calles utilizando
3. What do you do on your day off? los números ordinales..
4. Where do you work? When are you on vacation?
5. Do you work on the weekends?
6. Do you have a family reunion on December 25th
and 31st?

UNIT 4
Self evaluation
1 Which is not a complete date?

a) October 21st, 2009 3 Which statement is incorrect?
a) I will go at the morning.
b) December Eve b) We shop on Christmas.
c) February 14th, 2010 c) They watch TV at nine every night.
d) May 10th, 2000 d) She goes to the supermarket in
the afternoons.
2 Which is not an ordinal number?

a) nineteenth 4 Which of the following statements
are correct?
b) seventeenth a) The party is on Second Street.
c) twenties b) The restaurant is in Twenty
d) twenty-first One Avenue.
c) The stadium is on 13 North Street.
d) The mountain hotel is on Twenty-
First South Avenue.
4. a, c, d 3. a 2. c 1. b Answers:
NUMBERS
In our everyday lives, we use numbers in a wide
range of different contexts. We employ them
not only for counting, but also for telling the
time, dates, names of streets, on price tags, for
football scores, to rank runners in a marathon,
music in top lists, for bus lines, as telephone
numbers, number of floors on buildings and
so on. One thing Salvadorans must be careful
about is when using numbers and dates to fill
out forms. For example, the correct sequence of
elements for a date in El Salvador is day/month/
year, whereas for America it is month/day/year.
You must be aware that the order of elements
in a date may vary depending on the region you
are going to or referring to.

Unit Four Lesson 4
What do you do on your birthday?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son los diferentes eventos y días especiales
que celebran los salvadoreños?
¿Cómo se pregunta y se dice la edad en inglés?
¿Cómo se celebran los cumpleaños y otros
eventos especiales?
Cuáles eventos especiales celebra tu familia?
I can ask and answer wh- and yes/no questions in the present tense I can ask and tell people’s age, date and place of birth with correct
with grammatical accuracy. pronunciation and grammatical accuracy.
I can differentiate and correctly reproduce the phonemes /s/, /z/, and /ez/
of the third person singular in affirmative sentences in the present tense.
Which of the following are names of celebrations?
1. anniversaries 2. presents 3. weddings 4. music 5. birthdays 6. invitations

identify the celebrations that are mentioned. Look up
A: Hi, Maria. How is it going?
B: Hi, Raul. So far so good! How about you?
A: Pretty good. By the way, do you know that today is
Elizabeth’s birthday?
B: Of course! She was born in August. She is having a
party tonight at her new apartment.
A: Yeah, I know, but I have a big problem. I do not
know what to give her. Last year I gave her a
B:
T-shirt, but it was too large.
Don’t worry about it. If you want, we can go Activity 1
shopping right now.
A: Thanks a lot, Maria. Answer the following questions.
B: We can go to a clothing store and a shoe store. We
can buy her a purse and pair of sandals. 1. Who is having a birthday?
A: That’s a nice idea for a present. Do you know her size? 2. What do they want to buy her?
B: Yes, she’s a seven, and her favorite color is red. 3. Who buys the purse?
A: I really appreciate your help.
B: You’re welcome. You can buy her the sandals, and I 4. Who buys the sandals?
can buy her a purse.

UNIT 4

Celebrations and special events like family get-togethers,
barbecues, and weddings form part of our everyday
relationships with relatives and friends. Here is a short list
of the most common celebrations and events.
baptism baby shower
birthday anniversary
parade 15th birthday party
Activity 3
graduation procession
1. Which events do you usually celebrate with your family?
2. How do you celebrate them?
3. What do you do at each event?
2 Activity
Match the words on the left related to celebrations with their descriptions on the right.
Words Descriptions
1 site A A large outdoor fire often held in or fall/autumn.
2 procession B To honor the memory of an important event.
3 parade C Clothing that you wear as a disguise for fun to a party or another event.
4 float D A rocket which displays light in the sky.
5 flag E An exhibition; to exhibit for other people.
6 display F A banner showing colors representing a nation or special group of people.
7 firework G A large moving display, often with people aboard, used during a parade.
8 costume H A large procession of many people often featuring floats, marching
bands, etc.
9 commemorate I A group of people walking through town or another area.
10 bonfire J A location or place where something takes place.

UNIT 4
Time to read
Listen to and read the following article about a celebration.
Activity 4
1. What is “La Quinceañera”?
A. a fifteen year old girl
B. a sixteen year old girl
C. a fifteen year old boy
2. Who is invited to this party?

A. boys
B. girls
C. boys and girls
3. What does the girl have to wear for the occasion?

La Quinceañera A. a pink dress
My name is Maria Vazques, and I am from El Salvador. B. a pink uniform

One of the customs that is commonly celebrated in C. a white blouse and skirt
Central America is a girl’s 15th birthday. It is called a
quinceañera and is only celebrated for girls. It is similar
4. What kind of music do the guests dance to
to a sweet sixteen birthday in the United States. The
birthday girl usually dresses in a beautiful long pink dress “La Quinceañera”?
for the ceremony in the church. Her parents, relatives A. old music
and invited guests pray for her life and her future. On B. modern music
this day, she has a court of 14 girls. All of the girls dress
in the same color. The ceremony is often at night. First C. classical music
there is a ceremony in the church, and then there is a
big reception party in a hall or at the girl’s home. Here 5. What do the guests give to “La Quinceañera”?
the birthday girl has to dance a waltz with her father,
boyfriend, or special friend. Later, everybody dances A. presents
to modern music and eats dinner. Then an enormous B. hugs and kisses
birthday cake is cut and served to all of the guests. It is C. A and B
a tradition that every guest gives “La Quinceañera” a
present, hugs and kisses, and wishes her the best with her
future as a woman.
Activity 5
Don’t forget!
Local fiestas and carnivals occur throughout the year to 1. Maria Vazquez is from Spain.
venerate saints and to have fun. In San Vicente, people in
the procession perform a dance called Flores de Mayo and 2. A quinceañera is like a sweet sixteen birthday party.
children throw corn, candy and flowers in the parade’s path. 3. The birthday girl has a court of 15 girls.
At the San Miguel carnival, a lay celebration, the town is 4. First there is a ceremony in the church, and then there is
decorated with lights and people dance to marimba bands a big reception party in a hall or at the girl’s home.
on the main streets all night long.
Glossary: Afterwards: after that or later on.

Guest: people who are invited to a celebration.
Court: a group of young boys and girls.

UNIT 4

Activity 6
and practice it out loud. Look up any new words in Choose the letter that best answers each question.
a dictionary.
1. What is the boy’s name?
A: Good morning, Ricky. Happy Birthday! How old A. Tommy
are you today?
B: I am nine years old, dad. B. Ricky
A: Alright. Well, let’s sing Happy Birthday: C. Nicky
Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday to you.
Happy birthday dear Ricky, happy birthday to you.
2. How old is the boy?
B: Thanks a lot, daddy.
A: Alright. So what should we do first? What do you A. seven
want to eat? B. eight
B: How about cake and ice cream?
C. nine
A: Okay. Well, uh let . . . let’s light the nine candles.
Okay, and make a wish! Don’t . . . don’t tell me.
B: Don’t tell you? Why? 3. What does he want to do first?
A: Just keep the wish to yourself, and hopefully it will A. sleep and rest
come true. Don’t tell me. Okay, and go ahead and
blow out the candles. Okay, let’s cut the cake, and B. open presents
then we can have cake and ice cream. And what C. eat cake and ice cream
do you want to do after the cake and ice cream?
B: I would like to go to the movies and play
4. What will they do after they eat ice cream?
video games.
A: Wow! That’s perfect. Now let’s call your mother. A. go to the movies
She must be awake in Canada by now. B. play video games
B: That’s a great idea! Hurry up, daddy.
C. A and B
5. Who do they call?

A. his grandmother
B. his cousin
C. his mother
Hands on! 3D
The next part of the project includes writing

descriptions of what each festival or holiday
includes. Is there a parade? Is there music? How
do the people get involved? What activities are
carried out? Do they eat any special foods? Try to
be as specific as possible.

UNIT 4

Study the following table of celebrations with their definitions and an example for each.
Celebration Definition Example
barbecue outdoor event where people cook We will have all our friends over for a
on a grill barbecue in the garden next weekend.
christening baptismal celebration Jennifer will have her christening
next weekend.
family gathering an occasion during which members They will have a large family gathering
of the extended family meet to be for a picnic in the countryside.
with each other
anniversary a celebration for an anniversary Jose and Mary will celebrate their
party such as a marriage anniversary, work 25th anniversary with a large
anniversary etc. anniversary party with all of their
family and friends.
birthday party a celebration of someone’s birth I’ll throw a surprise birthday party for
my wife next year.
dinner party a party which takes place during a They’ll have a wonderful dinner party
long, usually formal, dinner for their friends this weekend.
party a celebration of some kind in which He puts on a great party. You should
many guests are invited be sure to go if he invites you.

Listen to and read following conversation. Look up any What for?
new words in a dictionary.
Daily routines are broken quite often by the act of
A: Hey, Loly, wait up! I want to tell you something celebrations and holidays. Many families and friends
really important. gather for weddings, birthdays, funerals, baptisms and
B: Hi, Sofia. What’s up? graduations at unexpected times during the year.
A: This weekend I’m having a birthday party for
Ricardo. I’d like you to come.
B: I’d love to. When and where is it?
A: We’re having it this Saturday at 7:00 p.m. at my
house, which is on Nineteenth Street North. We’re
going to order a pizza, play some games, and listen
Activity 7
to music.
B: It sounds like a lot of fun! But now that I think Decide whether the following statements are true or false.
about it, I promised I would do something with 1. Sofia wants to invite Loly to a barbecue.
Diego on Saturday night.
A: Well why don’t you bring him along? It would be 2. It is Diego’s birthday this weekend.
fun. Ricardo would really like that. I’m sure. 3. Loly has plans to do something with Diego on
B: Really? That would be great. Okay, I’ll ask Diego Saturday night.
to come along. What can I bring? 4. Sofia wants Diego to come to the party, too.
A: Nothing. No presents are necessary and
everything is ready. 5. Everybody is going to watch a video at Sofia’s house.
6. Loly needs to buy a present for Ricardo’s
birthday party.

UNIT 4
Language in use
Review of the present tense
The auxiliaries “do/don’t” and “does/doesn’t” are used in the simple present tense to form affirmatives, negatives
and questions.
Forming an affirmative statements
Simple present tense verbs have a special form for the third person singular.
Study the following table. Listen to and pay attention to the spelling and pronunciation.
Verb sound ending Third person singular: Examples
he, she and it Base – Third person singular
-s, -x, -ch, -sh, -z Add -es /iz/ pass - passes
relax - relaxes
wash - washes
consonant + -y Change -y to -i then add -es /iz/ fly - flies
fry - fries
study - studies
-c, -f, -h, -k, -p, -q, -t, Add –s /s/ celebrate - celebrates
some verbs end with silent -e like - likes
visit - visits
-b, -d, -g, -j, -l, -m, -n, -r, vowel+ Add –s /z/ bring-brings
-y some verbs end with give-gives
silent -e
play-plays
come-comes
Read the following examples:
1. On vacation my father watches television and sleeps a lot.
2. On Christmas my mother cooks turkey and makes tamales.
3. On Father’s Day my mother prepares a delicious dinner for my father.
Forming negative statements
To form a negative you have to put the negative auxiliary “doesn’t” or “don’t” after the subject and before the verb. Study
the following table of examples.
Affirmative statements Negative statements
I celebrate my wedding anniversary. I don’t celebrate my wedding anniversary.
You buy present for every occasion. You don’t buy present for every occasion.
She has a birthday party every year. She doesn’t have a birthday party every year.
He likes to go to dinner parties. He doesn’t like to go to dinner parties.
Forming an informative question

To form these questions you have to begin the question with a question word followed by the auxiliary “do” or “does”.
Study the table below with examples.
Questions Answers
What do you do on your birthday? I stay home and watch movies.
What does your mother do on her birthday? She rests and listens to music.
Where do you go to celebrate your birthday? We go to the beach.
Where does your family celebrate Christmas? My family celebrates it at home.
When do you celebrate Father’s Day? We celebrate it on June the 17th.

UNIT 4
Time to read
Activity 9
any new words in a dictionary. Choose the word that best completes each question. Then
write complete sentences to answer the questions.
Christmas is the day when Christians celebrate the birth
of Jesus Christ in Bethlehem nearly two thousand years 1. Where (do/does) Paul live?
ago. People remember Christmas as a religious holiday to 2. (Do/Does) you learn Spanish?
celebrate the birth of Jesus and his coming into this world. 3. When (do/does) Andres and Martin ride their bikes?
He is recognized as the Son of God and the Savior of the 4. What (do/does) they play on vacation?
world to these people. According to the Bible, Jesus was 5. (Do/Does) Sally go to school on Saturdays?
born in a manger because there was no room for him and
6. Where (do/does) the cats sit?
his parents, Mary and Joseph, in an inn. Today, Salvadorans
often attend church, organize family gatherings, and 7. Why (do/does) Steve wear shorts?
decorate their homes and businesses during this special
time of the year. Some Salvadorans feel the giving spirit and
donate their time and money to worthy causes or provide
volunteer service to the needy.
Activity 10
8 Activity 1.
2.
Does your family celebrate any special event?
If so, what does your family do to celebrate it?
3. When is your birthday?
Choose the letter that best answers each question. 4. What do you usually do on your birthday?
5. When is your mother or father’s birthday?
1. When do Christians celebrate the birth of Jesus Christ?
6. Where does your family celebrate New Year’s Eve?
A. at the beginning of December
7. Does your family go to the beach on New Year’s Day?
B. on December the 31st
C. on Christmas Day
2. What do Salvadorans often do on Christmas Day?

Activity 11
A. attend church Choose the verb form that best completes each statement.
B. have family gatherings
1. My son (like / loves) his dog.
C. A and B 2. She (have / has) a birthday cake.
3. Tomas doesn’t (study / studies) on vacations.
3. What do some Salvadorans feel on this day? 4. When (does / do) she have English classes?
A. a happy life 5. Samuel (clean / cleans) our bedroom once a week.
B. a giving spirit 6. Patty (wash / washes) the dishes in the afternoon.
C. a celebration
Lesson core
Conociste las diferentes clases de celebraciones y eventos especiales que se celebran entre amigos o en familia.
Además, estudiaste vocabulario y expresiones idiomáticas relacionadas a estos eventos y celebraciones, así
mismo como su pronunciación y escritura en Inglés. También, leíste y escuchaste temas relacionados con eventos
familiares. Practicaste como se pregunta por la edad y como se responde, así como formular preguntas en tiempo
presente y con terceras personas del singular en Ingles. Finalmente, respondiste a varias preguntas acerca de cuáles
son las celebraciones o eventos que tú y tu familia llevan a cabo y que actividades realizan en dichos eventos.
Glossary:
Inn: a small hotel

UNIT 4
Self evaluation
1 Which question is used to ask for the age

of a person? 3 Which of the following statements
are incorrect?
a) She rest and eat a lot in her birthday.
a) How old are you?
b) When are you having your b) My sister doesn’t work on her birthday.
birthday party? c) He usually watch videos at home
c) When were you born? on holidays.
d) Where were you born? d) My best friend celebrates his birthday
at a expensive restaurant.
2 Which of the following words are

not celebrations? 4 Which of the following is a celebration
of someone’s birth?
a) dinner a) family gathering
b) graduation b) dinner party
c) present c) birthday party
d) birthday party d) barbecue
4. c 3. a, c 2. a, c 1. a, c Answers:
BIRTHDAY TRADITIONS
Some traditions are quite similar in many parts
of the world. Several birthday traditions are
celebrated in many places such as candles to
carry wishes up to God, games, and pinches or
taps to ensure good luck for the coming year.
However, some traditions are more specific to
certain countries. The tradition of birthday parties
started in Europe a long time ago. It was feared
that evil spirits were particularly attracted to
people on their birthdays. To protect them from
harm, friends and family members would come
to be with the birthday person and bring good
thoughts and wishes. Giving gifts brought even
more good cheer to protect against the evil
spirits. This is how birthday parties began.

Unit Four Lesson 5
Where is Thanksgiving celebrated?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son los días festivos más importantes de
Estados Unidos de Norteamérica?
¿Cuáles son las celebraciones internacionales
más importantes?
¿Cómo se celebran esos eventos o días festivos?
¿Porqué se celebra el día de Acción de Gracias en
Estados Unidos?
I can identify and associate action verbs from audio material with the I can read and recognize dates of holidays and events in calendars,
corresponding holiday. magazine and articles.
I can successfully match written descriptions with the holiday described.
Which of the following are international holidays? in which we get together and have a family dinner.
1. Thanksgiving 2. birthday 3. Saint Patrick’s Day B: I have to go now, but I’ll see you later.
4. festival 5. Memorial Day A: Have a nice Thanksgiving!
B: Thanks a lot.

and identify the holiday that is being talked about. Look
A: Hi, Stephen. Where are you going?

B: Hey, Julia. I’m going to celebrate
Thanksgiving at the American Embassy.
Today’s the fourth Thursday of November.
A: Thanksgiving? What is that?
B: It’s a traditional American holiday. We usually eat
turkey and pumpkin pie.
A: Okay. And what does your family do on this
special day?
Activity 1
B: We have a family dinner. We talk about family
matters, and my mother cooks the Answer the following questions.
traditional dinner. 1. What is Stephen celebrating?
A: That sounds great. 2. Where is he going?
B: How about you, Julia? Do Salvadorans have a 3. What does his family do on this day?
similar holiday?
A: I really don’t know. But we have other celebrations 4. What is Thanksgiving?
5. On what special days do Salvadorans have a
family dinner?

UNIT 4

American holidays
Every month of the year has something special to celebrate
Activity 2
in the U.S. Throughout the years, the U.S. Congress has Match the dates with the American celebrations or holidays.
passed laws declaring special days as official observances
known as federal holidays. Each federal holiday represents When is it celebrated? Celebration or
a day when federal employees and many other workers holiday
have a paid day off from their jobs. There are some holidays 1 It’s celebrated on A Christmas
that Americans celebrate that are not federal holidays but January1st.
are very popular holidays to celebrate. 2 It’s celebrated on B Thanksgiving
February 12th.
3 It’s celebrated on C Veteran’s Day
February 14th.
4 It’s celebrated on D Halloween
March 17th.
5 It’s observed on the last E Columbus Day
Monday in May.
6 It’s celebrated on F Independence Day
June14th.
New Year’s Day Lincoln’s Birthday 7 It’s celebrated on July 4th. G Flag Day
8 It’s celebrated on H Memorial Day
October 12th.
9 It’s celebrated on I Saint Patrick’s Day
October 31st.
10 It’s celebrated on J Valentine’s Day
November 11th.
11 It’s celebrated on the 4th K Lincoln’s Birthday
Thursday in November.
12 It’s celebrated on L New Year’s Day
Valentine’s Day Saint Patrick’s Day December 25th.
Memorial Day Flag Day Independence Day Columbus Day
Halloween Veteran’s Day Thanksgiving Christmas

UNIT 4
Time to read
Listen to and read the following passage about
Thanksgiving carefully. Look up any new words in
a dictionary. Activity 3
Choose the letter that best answers the following questions.
1. When is Thanksgiving celebrated?
A. the second Thursday of November
B. the third Thursday of November
C. the fourth Thursday of November
2. What do Americans traditionally do on this day?

Many countries have a day of giving thanks at some A. people go to have a picnic
time during the year. In the United States, Thanksgiving B. people get together with family and friends
is celebrated on the fourth Thursday of the month of C. people get together and go on trips
November. Traditionally, this is the day when people get
together with family and friends to give thanks for their
many blessings including family, health, good fortune, 3. Who is chosen to offer grace?
and safety throughout the year. People usually prepare A. everybody
a wide variety of foods like turkey, sweet potatoes, B. nobody
pumpkin pie, green beans, mashed potatoes, and C. someone
cranberry sauce. The head of the house often carves the
turkey, and the rest of the family sits down to eat when all
of the food is ready and set on the table. 4. What do Americans cook on this day?
A. fried chicken and french fries
Often, someone is chosen to offer grace, or a prayer, to B. turkey, sweet potatoes and pumpkin pie
thank God for his many blessings. After the prayer is C. hamburgers and hotdogs
finished, people start passing the food around the table
and helping themselves to the dishes on the table. People
usually engage in light conversation as they eat. After 5. What do they do when the prayer is finished?
the meal is over, pumpkin pie is served. Then the family A. people start passing the food around the table and
helps clean up the table and dishes. It is often common helping themselves
for family members to sit and watch American football B. people start talking and dancing
on TV. C. people wait to be served by the older people
6. What do people usually engage in while eating?

A. light conversation
Hands on! 3E B. funny jokes
C. personal problems
In the last section of your report, you should
mention which holidays are celebrated on an 7. What is it served after the meal?
international level. Are these holidays the same in A. mashed potatoes
every country, or are they different in El Salvador B. pumpkin pie
and your hometown?
C. turkey
Glossary: Grace: a blessing.

Wide: ample or extensive. Engage: get interested in
Carves: cut in slices.
Mashed: smashed or crushed.

UNIT 4

Listen to the following passage about Valentine’s Day carefully.
Activity 6
Choose the letter that best completes each statement.
4 Activity 1.

Valentine’s Day __ on February 14th.
A. celebrates
B. is celebrated
C. Celebrate
Listen to the passage again and put the following
statements in the correct order.
2. Cupid is the most famous __ of Valentine’s Day.
__ People send cards, candy, chocolates, or flowers as A. symbol
valentines to their sweethearts, friends, and family. B. gift
__ The custom comes from the old Roman festival C. cartoon
called Lupercalia, which took place on February 15th.
__ Gradually the custom of giving gifts was replaced by 3. The origin of the __ of Saint Valentine’s Day came
sending cards. from a belief that birds began to mate on February 14th.
__ Today Valentine’s Day is a time to show love and A. habitat
affection. B. custom
__ Valentine’s Day is on February 14th. C. customers
__ It was a pagan festival.
__ During this festival young people drew names from 4. St. Valentine has been regarded as the __ saint
a box and exchanged gifts. of lovers.
A. patrol
B. patron
C. patroness
5 Activity

1. What do people send on Valentine’s Day?
Activity 7
A. cards
B. flowers Answer the following questions with your own information.
C. A and B
1. Which international holidays do you know?
2. When is Valentine’s Day celebrated?
2. Do Salvadorans celebrate any international holidays?
A. February 15th
3. Which international holidays do you celebrate?
B. February 14th
4. What do people do on these special days?
C. February 16th
3. Where does this custom come from? 5. Do you know people from other countries who
celebrate any of the above holidays?
A. an old Roman festival
B. a new Roman festival
C. A and B

UNIT 4
Enrich your Vocabulary

International holidays
Here is a list of the most common international holidays
celebrated in December around the world.
Date Holiday
December the 3rd First Sunday of Advent
(Christian, Roman Catholic)
December the 5th St. Nicholas Day
(Netherlands)
December the 6th Bodhi Day (Buddhist, Hindu)
December the 8th Las Posadas (Mexico)
December the Hanukkah (Chanukah, Jewish)
16th- 23rd
December the 22nd Winter Solstice
(International)
December the 24th Wigilia (Poland)
December the 25th Christmas (Christian, Roman
Catholic, International)
December the 26th Boxing Day (Canada, United
Kingdom)
December the Kwanzaa (African-American)
26th - Jan 1st
December the 29th Japanese New Year (Japan,
Buddhist, Hindu)
December the 31st New Year’s Eve (United
States, International)
8 Activity
Choose the word that best completes each statement. Then A New Year’s (7.resolution / resolve) is a decision one
read the passage about New Year’s in NewYork. makes to change something in the new year, for example
to quit smoking or to lose weight.
New Year’s Day is the first day of the year in the Many people don’t follow (8.through / around) with
Gregorian (1. schedule / calendar). these (9.resolutions / resolves).
New Year’s Eve is a time for (2. party / parties) and It is quite common to (10.test / toast) the New Year
celebrations. These celebrations culminate with the with champagne.
(3. ringing / eating) in of the new year at midnight. New Year’s Day is an official holiday in many countries.
Many cities around the world have (4. spectacular / People are most likely given the day off of work to
spectacled) fireworks displays at midnight on New Year’s (11.recover / review) from the previous night’s parties.
Eve. Some of the best known are in Sydney, New York, In the time before and after New Year’s Day, many radio
and London. and TV stations (12.broadcast / publish) various “best
In New York City, a lot of people (5. gather / collect) at of the year” lists. Numerous magazines and newspapers
Times Square to watch the traditional “ball-dropping” (13. broadcast / publish) the same types of lists.
ceremony (6.right / correct) before midnight.

UNIT 4
Language in use
Action verbs
Action verbs are verbs that show the performance of an action. They are dynamic verbs that show something
is happening. There are regular and irregular action verbs. There are two types of action verbs: transitive and intransitive.
1. A transitive verb conveys an action and is followed by 2. An intransitive verb conveys an action but is not
an object that receives the action of the verb. followed by an object.
Examples of transitive action verbs: Examples of intransitive action verbs:
I clean the windows every morning. The girl cries quietly.
I take my baby to the clinic. He runs in the mornings.
Subject Action verb: Transitive Object Complement
Marcos eats turkey on Thanksgiving Day.
Elizabeth dances to pop music at the dinner party.
They cook tamales on Christmas Eve.
Subject Action verb: Intransitive Complement
Marcos eats happily on Christmas Eve.
Elizabeth dances perfectly to all kinds of music.
They cook on Christmas day.
Study the following list of the some common action verbs. Listen to and repeat the verbs out loud.
achieve distribute improve save swim

blow do increase saw take
catch draw install select taste
climb dress interview sell teach
collect drink jump serve throw
command dry kick set tie
communicate engage kill shake touch
complete enter learn show treat
construct evaluate listen sit try
control exit maintain smell understand
count expand make spell undress
create explain meet spread update
cut fall move start utilize
dance feel offer stop walk
decide fight order study watch
describe fill plan submit withdraw
design find pray supply work
develop fix prepare support write
9 Activity
Write 10 original sentences using action verbs in affirmative and negative forms.

UNIT 4
Time to read
Listen to and read the following passage about Mexico’s
Activity 10
Day of the Dead carefully. Look up any new words in Decide whether the following statements are true or false.
a dictionary.
1. November first is a special day for the dead children.
November first is a special day to honor dead children. 2. On this day, people do not go to the cemetery.
On this day, people go to the cemetery to visit the 3. If the people have money, they can bring a big
graves. They take colored flowers, special dead food (old Mexican band to the cementery.
bread for example), typical Mexican food, and music.
Sometimes Mexican bands go and play in person. The 4. The people do not clean the tombs.
tombs are cleaned and decorated. Some people are at 5. November second is a special day for dead adults.
the cemetery all day and all night, and they even eat their 6. In Mexico on this day there is not a big party in
meals there on this day. the cemetery.
November second is a special day to honor dead adults.
The customs are similar but on this day it is typical to
have a big party in honor of the dead. On this day in
Mexico there is a big party in every cemetery.
Activity 11
Answer the following questions by matching the place of origin
to the following holidays and special days.
Origin Holidays
1 Christians/ A Wigilia
Roman Catholics
2 Netherlands B St. Nicholas Day
3 Buddhists/Hindus C New Year’s Eve
4 Mexico D Las Posadas
5 Jewish people E Kwanzaa
6 Poland F Hanukkah
7 Canada/ G First Sunday of
United Kingdom Advent
8 African-Americans H Boxing Day
9 United States/ I Bodhi Day
International
Lesson core
Conociste varios día festivos de diferentes países o regiones alrededor del mundo,
especialmente la que llevan a cabo en los Estados Unidos de Norteamérica.
También, practicaste la pronunciación, escritura y uso de vocabulario relacionado
a estos tema en particular. Además, estudiaste las fechas en donde se llevan a cabo
estas celebraciones, así como aquellas actividades que realizan las personas en esas
actividades. Finalmente, conociste y practicaste diferentes verbos que expresan
acción en diferentes contextos.

UNIT 4
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following is an

American celebration?
a) Cinco de Mayo
3 Where is Las Posadas celebrated?
a) Poland
b) Canada
b) Las Posadas
c) Mexico
c) Thanksgiving
d) Germany
d) the Day of the Cross

American celebration? 4 Which celebration takes place on the
fourth Thursday of November?
a) All Souls Day
a) Saint Patrick’s Day
b) Wigilia b) Thanksgiving
c) Memorial Day c) Columbus Day
d) Halloween d) Memorial Day
4.b 3. c 2. b 1. c Answers:
CHRISTMAS CELEBRATIONS
Christmas is celebrated in many different ways

around the world. In the United States and other
countries, many churches and homes display a
nativity scene.
These scenes include little statues of Joseph,
Mary and baby Jesus in a stable. They are usually
surrounded by the shepherds, angels, the three
wise men, and animals. Some churches also have
a live nativity service with real people and animals
acting in the roles as those who were present at
Jesus’ birth. Nativity recreations originated during
the Middle Ages when many people could not read
Latin, the language of the Church.

Answer Key
Lesson 1 Activity 9: 1. E 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. A
Activity 1: 1. to the beach 2. Mother’s Day 3. Canada Activity 10: 1. December 25th 2. February 14th
4. Yes, he does. 5. Yes, he does. 3. August 1st to 6th 4. September 15th
Activity 2: 1. motherhood 2. bouquet 3. out, seems 5. November 2nd 6. June 22nd
4. relatively, masculine Activity 11: Answers may vary.
Activity 3: 1. Day of the Dead (All Souls Day) Activity 12: 1. It’s January 1, 2008. 2. It’s February
2. Independence Day 3. Christmas 4. Plaza 14, 2009. 3. It’s May 10, 2008.
Libertad 5. Children celebrate it with 4. June 22, 2001 5. December 31, 2009
firecrackers and fireworks.
Activity 13: 1. September 15, 1821 2. October 12,
Activity 4: 1. A 2. A 3. A 4. C 1492 3. January 16, 1992 4. January
Activity 5: 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. E 13 and February 13, 2001
Activity 6: Answers may vary. Activity 14: 1. July 2. March 3. September
Activity 7: 1. rising 2. falling 3. falling 4. rising 4. December 5. January 6. October
5. falling 6. rising 7. falling 8. rising 7. April 8. August 9. May 10. February
11. November 12. June
Activity 8: 1. romance 2. typical 3. card 4. inspire
5. dates 6. candlelit 7. accept, spend Activity 15: 1. Monday 2. Friday 3. Sunday 4. April
5. June 6.May 7. February 8. Tuesday
8. sweetheart 9. dozen 10. bouquet
9. November 10. August
Lesson 2 Lesson 3
Activity 1: 1. Labor Day and Mother’s Day Activity 1: 1. December the 21st 2. at the Great
2. in May 3.stay home, go to the beach, have Carnival Hall 3. at 7 p.m.
lunch with family, have a barbecue, get Activity 2: 1. January 2. July 3. December 4. October
together with the family 5. March 6. June 7. November 8. February
Activity 2: 1. January 2. June 3. December 4. April 9. May 10. August 11. September 12. April
5. September November 6. March Activity 3: 1. B 2. E 3. G 4. F 5. C 6. D 7. A
7. August 8. February 9. June 10. April
11. October Activity 4: 1. False 2. False 3. False 4. False 5. True
6. False 7. True
Activity 5: 1. B 2. A 3. A 4. B
Activity 4: 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. A 5. A
Activity 6: 1. C 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. C
Activity 7: 1. E 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. A
Activity 6: 1. May 2. Indians 3. Spaniards 4. cross
Activity 8: 1. January the first 2. February the fourteenth
5. tropical 6. paper 7. sign 8. adorar 3. May the first 4. May the tenth 5. June
Activity 7: 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. B the seventeenth 6. June the twenty-second
Activity 8: Answers may vary. 7. September the fifteenth 8. October
the twelfth 9. Novermber the second

UNIT 4
Answer Key
10. December the twenty-fifth
Activity 9: 1. C 2. B 3. B 4. C 5. A 6. B 7. A 8. A
Activity 8: 1. calendar 2. parties 3. ringing 4. spectacular
Activity 10: 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. A 5. gather 6. right 7. resolution 8. through
Activity 11: Answers may vary. 9. resolutions 10. toast 11. recover 12. broadcast
Activity 12: 1. at 2. at 3. at 4. in 5. at 6. on 7 . in 8. in 13. publish
9. on 10. on Activity 9: Answers may vary.
Activity 10: 1. True 2. False 3. True 4. False 5. True 6 False
Activity 11: 1. G 2. B 3. I 4. D 5. F 6. A 7. H 8. E 9. C
Lesson 4
Activity 1: 1. Elizabeth 2. a purse and sandals
3. Maria 4. Raul
Activity 2: 1. J 2. I 3. H 4. G 5. F 6. E 7. D 8. C 9. B 10. A
Activity 4: 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C
Activity 5: 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True
Activity 6: 1. B 2. C 3. C 4. C 5. C
Activity 7: 1. False 2. False 3. True 4. True 5. False 6. False
Activity 8: 1. C 2. C 3. B
Activity 9: 1. does 2. Do 3. do 4. do 5. Does 6. do 7. does
Activity 11: 1. loves 2. has 3. study 4. does 5. cleans
6. washes
Lesson 5
Activity 1: 1. Thanksgiving 2. to the American Embassy
3. have a family dinner 4. It’s a traditional
American holiday. 5. Answers may vary.
Activity 2: 1. L 2. K 3. J 4. I 5. H 6. G 7. F 8. E 9. D
10. C 11. B 12. A
Activity 3: 1. C 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. A 7. B
Activity 4: 7, 2, 5, 6, 1, 3, 4
Activity 5: 1. C 2. B 3. A
Activity 6: 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. B

Hands on!
“My hometown festivals”

Purpose
description of your hometown festivals in which you will include the holidays and special days of your place
of origin.
Theory and practice

The different phases of the unit four project (from Hands on! 3A to Hands on!3E) gave you ideas on how to
understand the concepts or sections which are included in the description of your hometown festivals.
With these different project phases, you should have kept track of key elements or aspects to have a clear picture of
which different special events or festivals could be included in your project.
Development
You should have noticed that when completing different activities, you were gaining or obtaining the basic
knowledge to create a simple description of your hometown festivals.
Remember, or take another look at, the activities which gave you some good practice to help complete your project.
The activities provided you with some good background and with this you will be able to do your project efficiently.
Wrap up
To complete project three, fill out the sections of your hometown festivals form which you see below as a model.
You can add more elements if you want or create one on your own. Keep this template in mind and complete it with
more information, as it will help you on future projects. Do not forget to include some pictures or photos of the
special events.
Month of Holiday/ Location/ Descriptions of

Days
the Year Celebration Address Activities

Resources
For use of an online dictionary:
For more about national holidays:

http://www.qppstudio.net/publicholidays2008/el_salvador.htm
http://www.gts-translation.com/El_Salvadorholidays.asp
For more practice with dates:

http://www.englishclub.com/vocabulary/time-date.htm
http://humanities.byu.edu/elc/teacher/sectiontwo/Lesson10.html
For more on the months of the year:

http://www.crowl.org/Lawrence/time/months.html
http://www.buzzle.com/articles/what-are-the-meanings-for-the-months-of-the-year.html
http://www.infoplease.com/ipa/A0002067.html
For more on ordinal numbers:

http://www.learn-english-online.org/Lesson22/Course/Lesson22.htm
http://www.ego4u.com/en/cram-up/vocabulary/numbers/ordinal
For more about birthdays and special events:

http://www.enchantedlearning.com/themes/birthday.shtml
http://www.kidsparties.com/FamilyBirthdayTraditions.htm
http://www.kidsparties.com/TraditionsInDifferentCountries.htm
For more about international holidays and celebrations:

http://web2.uvcs.uvic.ca/courses/elc/studyzone/200/vocab/furn.htm
http://www.armchair.com/info/holidays.html
http://www3.kumc.edu/diversity/december.html
http://dic.academic.ru/dic.nsf/enwiki/7927
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Holiday#Religious_holidays
http://www3.kumc.edu/diversity/ethnic_relig/christms.html

V
ENGLISH
Unit 5
YOU MADE MY DAY
Objetives:
Recognize language related to time, habitual actions and
entertainment in order to establish a conversation about daily
routines, schedules, frequency of activities, personal hobbies and
leisure time activities.
Use vocabulary and structures learned, by exchanging oral
and written language, in order to talk about daily routines, daily
schedules, frequency of habitual activities, personal hobbies and
leisure time activities.
Unit 5
You made my
day!
Listening Grammar
Speaking Vocabulary
Reading
Pronunciation
Writing
Telling time Daily activities Frequency Hobbies and Past activities: Use
adverbs entertainment of the
auiliary “did”
Unit Guidelines
In this unit you will learn how to ask and tell the time properly. Besides that, you’ll talk about different activities or
routines that you perform every day. In addition, you’ll learn how to ask about people’s hobbies and leisure time
activities. Finally, you’ll learn how to use vocabulary and structures in order to talk about daily routines and schedules,
as well as the use of past tense verb forms to express past activities.

In this unit you will work on the last project called “My monthly agenda”. You will write down your agenda for a month
and include all of the dates and activities which are carried out. You should include your weekly routines or activities in a
schedule or timetable. At the end of the unit you will be able to make a complete monthly agenda to better organize your
time. This project is going to be beneficial to you because you will be able to organize and distribute your time efficiently
and effectively. You might even find that you have more time each day to do extra things!
Look at the following websites to find sample forms:
http://www.vertex42.com/ExcelTemplates/work-schedule-template.html
http://www.nadsa.org/docs/sample_daily_schedule.pdf
http://www.centerforhopeofthesierras.com/pdf/Sample_Schedule.pdf

Unit Five Lesson 1
What time is it?
Getting started!
C
¿ uáles son las diferentes formas de preguntar y responder la
hora en Inglés?
¿Cómo se dicen las diferentes horas del día en Inglés?
¿Por qué algunos países tienen diferentes horas en comparación

con la de El Salvador?
¿Cuáles son tus rutinas o actividades semanales?
I can use appropriate expressions to tell the hours, half hours, quarters I can identify and associate time expressions from audio sources to
and minutes. different moments of the day.
I can clearly recognize different forms to tell the time of the day.
Which of the following are different moments of a day?

1. morning 2. hour 3. afternoon 4. day 5. evening
6. minutes 7. night

Listen to and read the following conversation and then
identify moments of the day that are mentioned. Look
A: Good morning, Julio. Where are you going?

B: Hi, Gabriela. I am going to work, and I am very late.
A: Oh. But today is Sunday. Do you work
B:
on Sundays?
No, but today is inventory day. And we have to Activity 1
begin today and finish by tomorrow afternoon.
A: Wow! Sorry about that! Answer the following questions according to the
B: By the way, what time is it now? previous conversation.
A: It’s eight o’clock.
B: Eight? I have to be there at eight thirty. 1. Who is going to work?
A: Where is your office? 2. Does he work on Sundays?
B: It’s on 25th Avenue North. 3. What time is it now?
A: If you want, I can give you a ride. I’m going to play 4. What time does he have to be at work?
soccer near there. 5. Where is his office?
B: That would be great! Thanks a lot, Gabriela.
Glossary: Give a ride: to go or travel by car or any vehicle for free.
O’clock: the contraction form for the expression of the clock.
Inventory: a detailed list of goods and materials in a business.

UNIT 5

A. Day and night
There are 24 hours in a day. The day is divided into “day

(time)” and “night (time)”. Daytime is from sunrise (this
varies but we can say approximately 6 a.m.) to sunset (we
can say approximately 6 p.m.). Nighttime is from sunset
to sunrise.
Every day starts precisely at midnight. AM (Ante-
Meridiem = before noon) starts just after midnight. PM
(Post-Meridiem=after noon) starts just after midday.
B. The time
We measure time mainly with seconds, minutes, hours,
days, weeks, months and years. Study the following tables.
Time expression Description Moments of a day
1 second 1000 milliseconds afternoon
1 minute 60 seconds dawn
1 hour 60 minutes dusk
1 day 24 hours evening
1 week 7 days midnight
1 month 28, 29, 30 or 31 days morning
1 year 365 or 366 days night
1 year 12 months noon (midday)
1 decade 10 years sunrise
1 century 100 years sunset
1 millennium 1000 years
v 2 Activity
Match the words on the left with their definitions on the right.
Word Definition
1 night A The time in the evening at which the sun begins to fall below
the horizon.
2 midnight B The first light of day; the daily event of the sun rising above
the horizon.
3 morning C The middle of the day.
4 noon D The time period between dawn and noon.
5 sunrise E 12 o’clock at night; the middle of the night.
6 sunset F The time after sunset and before sunrise while it is dark.

UNIT 5
Time to read Another way to start adjusting to the new time is to find
out when the hours of light and dark will be in your
Listen to and read the following excerpt from the article new home. What you want to do is start to pull the shades
called “How to Deal with Time Differences When You at your current location to start to mimic this new day and
Live Abroad” carefully. Look up any new words in night pattern. Your body is ruled by the light that it sees, so
a dictionary. once you start to change that, the circadian rhythms that
guide your sleep and wake cycles will also change.
One of the most frustrating parts about living abroad is Emotionally speaking, your friends and family will have a
the significant time change for some people. You are not lot of trouble adjusting to your new time zone as well.
only physically moving away from what is comfortable,
but you also need to change the way that you look at your While you used to be able to talk whenever you wanted
time both physically and emotionally. to, now you will need to consider the various time zones
and what is too late or too early. You can help to ease this
First of all, you will need to physically prepare yourself by keeping two clocks in your new home to remind you
for your new time schedule. If you are moving to an area of what time it is where your family and friends are. You
that is eight or more hours different than your own time, might also want to discuss good times to call in order to
you will find that you need a long period of adjustment keep in touch without disrupting anyone’s sleep.
before you settle into a new routine. You can help this
process along by trying to adjust to the new hours before
you even move. Set your clocks to the new time and try
to follow the schedule on that schedule. Some people
swear that using medicine helps to reset their internal
Activity 3
clocks as well. By simply taking one supplement about a
half an hour before bed, the body can learn to go to sleep Decide whether the following statements are true or false.
at that time, rather than when you were going to
sleep before. 1. One of the most exciting parts about living abroad is
the significant time change for some people.
2. You do not need to physically prepare yourself for a
new time schedule.
3. Another way to start adjusting to a new time is to
find out when the hours of light and dark will be in
the new place.
4. Emotionally speaking, your friends and family will
have a lot of trouble adjusting to your new time zone
as well.
5. You might want to discuss good times for family
and friends to call in order to keep in touch without
disrupting anyone’s sleep.
What for?
What for? The world is divided into 24 time zones spaced at

intervals of 15 degrees in longitude. The zones start
The word “day” can have two meanings: 1) the 24 at 0 with Greenwich. Within each time zone, the
hours between one midnight and the next and 2) hour and minute of the day is defined to be the same.
the time between sunrise and sunset (as distinct Time zones are usually specified by the number of
from night). hours they differ from GMT. EST is GMT 5 hours.
Glossary: Mimic: imitate.

Excerpt: a piece or a portion of something. Circadian: biological processes occurring at 24-hour intervals.
Significant: important. Consider: think about.
Adjustment: modification. Ease: relieve or alleviate.
Reset: reorganize.
Supplement: a type of medicine.
UNIT 5

Listen to and read the following conversations carefully and then repeat them out loud. Look up any new words in
a dictionary.
A: David, what time do buses leave for Chalatenango? A: What time is it?
B: 11 a.m. and 2 p.m. B: It’s 11:30. I’m getting hungry.
A: Really? I thought it was 10 a.m. and 1 p.m. A: Me too. Let’s go eat.
B: Perhaps you are right. I’ll just ask that man. B: Do you know of a good place to eat?
A: What did he say? A: Yes, the Salvatrout is not far away from here.
B: Both of us are wrong. They leave at 6 a.m. B: Do they have Salvadoran food?
and 4 p.m. A: Yes, I think they do.
A: All right. Then we’ll go in the afternoon. B: Can we go by taxi or bus?
B: What time does the bus arrive at Citala? A: We can go on foot. It will only take us five minutes.
A: Probably at 7 in the evening. B: Are you sure?
B: That is convenient. We do not need to eat on the bus. A: Yes, I am. Let’s go now.
B: Okay.
4 Activity
Answer the following questions about conversation 1.

1. Where are they going?
2. What time does the first bus leave?
3. What time does the last bus leave? Activity 6
4. When will they take the bus?
Answer the following questions about the conversation 2.
5 Activity 1.
2.
What time is it?
Are the two people hungry?
3. Where are they going to eat?
4. Does the restaurant sell Salvadoran food?
1. Do you travel by bus or car? 5. How will they get to the restaurant?
2. What time do you go to work?
3. What time does the last bus leave for your hometown?
4. What time does the first bus leave in your hometown?
Glossary: Perhaps: maybe or possible.

Thought: the past tense of “think”.

UNIT 5
Language in use
Telling time: Part 1 Activity 7
A. Asking the time
Study the following phrases you can use when you want Write the time in numbers.
to know the time:
1. What’s the time?
1. a quarter past one
2. What time is it? 2. twenty-five past seven
3. Do you have the time? 3. a quarter to three
4. three o’clock
B. Telling the time
5. twenty to eleven
To tell someone what the time is, we can say “The time 6. five past eight
is...” or, more commonly, “It’s...”. Study the a typical
question and answer below: 7. five to four
8. twenty past eleven
9. ten past two
Question: What’s the time, please?
10. noon
Answer: It’s three o’clock.
The chart below shows you two different ways to tell

someone what the time is.
Hour It’s... It’s...

Activity 8
7:00 seven o’clock seven Write the following times in words.
7:02 just past seven o’clock seven oh two
7:03 three minutes past seven seven oh three 1. 7:00
7:05 five past seven seven oh five 2. 8:10
7:09 nine minutes past seven seven oh nine 3. 9:25
7:10 ten past seven seven ten 4. 10:30
7:15 a quarter past seven seven fifteen 5. 11:40
7:20 twenty past seven seven twenty
6. 12:35
7:21 twenty-one minutes past seven twenty-one
seven 7. 1:55
7:25 twenty-five past seven seven twenty-five 8. 2:05
7:30 half past seven seven thirty 9. 3:15
7:35 twenty-five to eight seven thirty-five 10. 4:45
7:40 twenty to eight seven forty
7:45 a quarter to eight seven forty-five
7:50 ten to eight seven fifty
7:55 five to eight seven fifty-five
7:57 three minutes to eight seven fifty-seven
7:58 nearly eight o’clock seven fifty-eight
8:00 eight o’clock eight

UNIT 5
Language in use
Telling time: Part 2 Activity 9
Match the times in numbers on the left to the time on words
on the right.
1 3:55 A It’s twenty-five past four.
2 1:45 B It’s ten past four.
3 2:40 C It’s twenty to three.
4 11:30 D It’s half past eleven.
5 4:25 E It’s twenty past six.
6 4:10 F It’s five to four.
7 6:20 G It’s a quarter to two.
Study the following table of rules for telling the time

in English.
Rules Examples
Say the hours first and then It’s seven forty-five.
the minutes.
In English we use “past/after” It’s seven past ten.
to say times after the hour It’s seven after ten.
until half past, or 30 minutes
past the hour.
We use “to/before” to say It’s twenty-nine to five.
times before the hour from It’s twenty before
31 minutes until the full hour. five.
In English we use o’clock It’s eight o’clock.
only at the full hour.
We can also just say the It’s seven twenty-five.
numbers in groups of two.
When speaking about the I work in the
different times of the day we morning/afternoon/
often use: in the morning, in evening.
the afternoon, in the evening.
Be careful! In English we use I work at night.
at night NOT in the night.
More formal expressions to It’s three fifteen a.m.
indicate whether a time is It’s four a.m.
before noon or after are a.m. Don’t forget!
(also: am - ante meridiem, It’s five thirty p.m.
before noon) and p.m. (also: It’s six p.m.
pm - post meridiem, after There are two types of clocks: A clock with hands, called
noon). Use these expressions an analog clock, and a clock with numbers only, called a
only with the formal way of digital clock.
telling the time.

UNIT 5
10 Activity
Hands on! 4A
Listen to the statements and choose the letter with the
correct time. In order to complete the unit project, you have to know
1. Our class begins at __. how to express the time correctly so that you can write
A. 4:05 down the dates and times of the activities properly on
B. 4:15 your agenda or schedule.
C. 4:50
2. My mother works this morning at __.

A. 9:03
B. 9:13 Activity 11
C. 9:30
3. I’m going to catch my bus at __. Listen to and repeat the following questions, and then
A. 3:40 answer them.
B. 4:20
C. 12:04 1. What’s the time?
2. What time is it?
4. Let’s get together at __. 3. Do you have the time?
A. 12:05 4. Could you tell me what time it is?
B. 5:12
5. Can you tell me the time, please?
C. 5:22
6. Do you know what time it is?
5. The store opens at __.
A. 4:06
B. 5:45
C. 6:15
Lesson core
6. The movie starts at __.
A. 7:04
Conociste las diferentes formas de decir la hora
B. 7:14
en Inglés. Practicaste como escribir las diferentes
C. 7:40 horas del día, ya sea en forma numérica o usando
palabras. Además, conociste algunas reglas que
7. The internet cafe closes at__ . se siguen para decir la hora en Inglés en forma
A. 10:00 apropiada. Finalmente, conociste y practicaste
B. 10:05 varias formas gramaticales de cómo formular
C. 10:10
preguntas para saber la hora en Inglés.
8. I will work at __ tomorrow.

A. 8:05
B. 8:15
C. 8:25

UNIT 5
Self evaluation

1 Which of the following words is not

a part of a day? 3 Which time stands for 8:45?
a) eight forty
a) morning b) fifteen to eight
b) night c) a quarter before nine
c) sunny d) a quarter after eight
d) afternoon
2 What does GMT stand for?

a) Western Countries 4 Which hour stands for ten to ten?
a) 10:00
b) Greenwich Mean Time b) 9:50
c) Universal Co-ordinated c) 10:10
d) General Mean Time d) 11:50
4. b 3. c 2.b 1. c Answers:
TIME ZONES
The United States spans six time zones. It
shares the main four time zones with Canada
(Eastern Time, Central Time, Mountain Time and
Pacific Time).
Daylight saving time is observed in the U.S. and
its territories, except in American Samoa, Guam,
Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the states
of Hawaii and Arizona. However, the Navajo
Nation, which is partially contained in the state
of Arizona, participates in the daylight saving
time policy due to its large size and location in
three states.

Unit Five Lesson 2
What do you do in the morning?
Getting started!
¿Qué actividades realizas en la mañana?
¿Cuáles son las actividades principales que realizas

en la semana?
¿Cómo distribuyes tu tiempo?
¿Cuáles expresiones de tiempo utilizas para decir las

acciones que realizas cotidianamente?
I can confidently exchange information about the daily schedule for I can successfully read vocabulary classified by categories, related to
personal activities at home, work and school. daily activities.
Which of the following activities do you do in the morning?
1. wake up 2. study 3. eat 4. sleep 5. work 6. play 7. exercise 8. rest

identify the months of the year that are mentioned. Look
A: Hey! Carlos! Carlos, wake up! Wake up! B: Thanks a lot. Hold on! Hold on, grandma! What
B: What? Oh grandma, give me five more day is it today?
minutes please. A: Today is Monday the 5th.
A: Carlos, come on! It’s late. B: Oh no, grandma!
B: What time is it? A: What’s wrong?
A: It’s 6:45. The store opens at 7:30 a.m. B: Today is my day off!
B: It’s too late now. I will not be on time.
A: Don’t say that. I’ll give you a hand. Go and take a
bath. I’ll iron your clothes.
B:
A:
Okay. Thanks a lot.
Carlos, hurry up! Activity 1
B: I am ready now but I am still sleepy.
A: I made some sandwiches for you. Answer the following questions about the previous conversation.
B: Thanks a lot.
A: Carlos wait, wait! 1. Who is late for work?
B: Why? 2. Who wakes him up?
A: You forgot to put on your belt.
B: You’re right. Where is it? 3. What time does the store open?
A: It’s on the night table. I’ll bring it. 4. Is today his day off?

UNIT 5

Daily activities: Part 1
What do you do every day?
Study the list of common daily activities.
get up wash your face take a bath/ shower get dressed
brush your teeth dry your hair go to school eat
drink take a bus listen to music watch tv
clean the house wash the dishes read a book go to bed
2 Activity
Answer the following questions in complete sentences. Follow 3. What time do you brush your teeth?
the example below. 4. What time do you eat breakfast?
5. What time do you have lunch?
Example: What time do you wake up? 6. What time do you eat dinner?
Answer: I wake up at 6:00 a.m. 7. What time do you watch TV?
1. What time do you get up? 8. What time do you listen to music?
2. What time do you take a bath? 9. What time do you go to work?

UNIT 5
Time to read
Listen to and read the following narration carefully. Look Listen to the following narration carefully.
Narration 2
Narration 1
Rutilio Martinez wakes up at six o’clock every morning.
He gets up at six fifteen. Then he takes a hot shower at
six twenty. At about six thirty he gets dressed and eats
breakfast. After breakfast he reads the newspaper until
Activity 4
seven, and then he leaves for work at a quarter past seven.
After that he gets on the bus at the bus stop, rides it to El Choose the letter that best answers each question about
Roble Avenue, gets off, and walks to his office. He works narration 2.
until five o’clock. At five thirty he usually goes to play 1. What time does she wake up?
soccer with friends. Then he goes home at about seven. A. 7:00
Rutilio leads a very boring life. B. 7:15
C. 7:30
2. What time does she get up?

A. 7:00
B. 7:15
C. 8:00
3. What time does she eat breakfast?

A. 8:00
B. 8:15
C. 8:30
4. What time does she leave her apartment?

A. 8:00
B. 8:15
C. 8:30
5. What time does she get to work?

A. 9:00
3 Activity

B. 9:15
C. 9:30
Match the hour with the activity according to narration 1.
Hour Activity Don’t forget!

1 5:30 p.m. A He goes home.
2 4:30 p.m. B He wakes up. Each sleep cycle lasts 90 minutes. There is a 20-minute
3 6:30 a.m. C He gets up. grace period before you restart your sleep cycle. If you
4 6:15 a.m. D He gets dressed.
can, try and set your alarm clock to go off in 5 sleep cycles.
For example, if you go to bed at 10:00 set it for 5:30. five
5 6:00 a.m. E He works in his office. times ninety minutes in advance. This will allow you to
6 7:00 p.m. F He plays soccer with make a fresh start to the day.
his friends.

UNIT 5

Listen to and read the following interview carefully. Look
Activity 5
Choose the letter that best answers each question about the
A: So, what’s your usual day like? You always seem previous conversation.
so busy.
1. What time does she usually get up?
B: Well, I usually get up around 5:30 a.m.
A: Why do you get up so early? A. 5:30
B: Well, I have to clean my house and leave home at B. 5:00
six thirty so I can catch a bus at about 7:00 o’clock. C. 6:00
A: And what time do you get to work?
B: Well, my bus takes about an hour to get there, but
it stops near my office so I get to work at 2. What time does she get to work?
about 8:00. A. 7:00
A: That’s nice. And what time do you get off of work?
B: Around 5:00 o’clock. I take the bus to get back B. 8:00
home at 5:15 in the afternoon. C. 9:00
A: What do you do then?
B: When I arrive home, I check my children’s
3. What time does she get off of work?
homework.
A: What time do you have dinner? A. 4:00
B: At 7:00, but I have to cook it. B. 4:15
A: What do you do then? C. 4:55
B: I talk and play with the kids until 8:00 p.m. or so.
A: What do you do after that?
B: Well, I often watch TV or listen to music until 4. What time does she have dinner?
10:00 o’clock. Then I sometimes stay up until A. 7:00
11:00 because I have to finish washing the dishes
and the kid’s dirty clothes. B. 7:30
A: What time do you go to sleep then? C. 8:00
B: At about 11:30.
5. What time does she go to bed?
A.10:00
B. 10:30
C. 11:30
What for?
Exercise regularly. Not only will it improve your

health, but better circulation will improve your
complexion, and pushing your body to the limit
will also ensure better sleep that night. However,
do not exercise vigorously right before bed or your
body will not be ready to calm down or relax.

UNIT 5

Daily activities: Part 2
Here is another list of activities which can take place throughout the day. Study the table below. How many of these
things do you do?
To begin my day My day In the morning In the evening
wash one’s face listen to the radio get up lock the door
wash one’s hands eat breakfast stretch draw the curtains
brush one’s teeth feed the pets yawn close the blinds
wash one’s hair water the plants oversleep go to bed
take a shower get ready open the curtains set the alarm
have a bath go to work open the blinds fall asleep
soap oneself down go to school switch the light on
dry off go home make one’s bed
dry one’s hands get back from school
shave do one’s homework
use the toilet have a rest
get dressed take a nap
do one’s hair have a cup of tea
brush/comb one’s hair have dinner
put on make-up watch television
put in contact lenses watch a movie
put on glasses read a book
invite guests over
Match the pictures with the daily activities below.
Answer the following questions about your daily routine.
A. read a book D. water the plants
1. What do you do in the morning? B. shave E. wash your hands
2. What do you do in the afternoon? C. put on make up F. brush your hair
3. What do you do in the evening? 1. 2. 3.
4. What do you do on Saturdays?
5. What do you do on Sundays?
4. 5. 6.

UNIT 5
Language in use
To express daily activities in English, verbs are used in the simple present tense. If you want to know what people do in a
day or specific time or moment of a day, you can use the following questions:
Question word Auxiliary Subject Verb Complement

What time do I go to bed?
do you have breakfast?
does he go to work?
does she take a bath?
do we watch a movie?
do you study English?
do they come from work?
You can use prepositions of time to respond to these kinds of questions.

Study the following table:
Questions Prepositions in answers

What time do I go school? at seven o’clock
What time do you have lunch? at about twelve
What time does he go to study? by nine
What time does she come from work? around eight
What time do we do our homework? from three to five
What time do you use the computer? before nine
What time do they take a shower? after six thirty
When do you have your next vacation? in August
When does she talk to her parents in the evenings
8 Activity
Match the questions on the left with their corresponding answers on the right.
Questions Answers
1 What time does she get up? A He meets clients in the afternoon.
2 Who does he have breakfast with? B They have lunch in the office cafeteria.
3 How does he go to work? C He has breakfast with his wife.
4 What time does she get to the office? D He goes to work by bus.
5 Where do they have lunch? E She gets up at about 6 o’clock.
6 What does he do in the afternoon? F She gets to the office just before nine.
7 What time do you finish work? G I finish work at about six.

UNIT 5
Write original questions using the phrases given below. Read the following narration carefully. And then answer the
questions below.
Example: brush your teeth in the morning
I get up very early, at about 5 o’clock. I have breakfast
Answer: What time do you brush your teeth in with my wife and then leave for work at 7:00. I go to
the morning? work by bus and get to the office just before eight. When
I arrive at the office, I always check my email. I get a
1. have dinner lot of messages from our other offices. I usually have
a meeting with my boss from 10 to 11 o’clock. I have
2. talk to your friends lunch in the office cafeteria at noon. The food isn’t very
3. do the English homework good but it’s cheap. After lunch I either meet new clients
4. exercise or write reports. I usually finish work at about 5 o’clock,
although I occasionally work overtime. I get home about
5. have a coffee break at work an hour later and have dinner with my family. In the
evening around 7:00 p.m., I help my children with their
homework and watch television with my wife.
10 Activity 1.What time do I get up?
A. at five
B. at six
Choose the word that best completes each statement. C. at seven
1. John is arriving on January 26 (at/in) 2 o’clock in 2. What time do I leave for work?
A. at seven
the afternoon. B. at seven thirty
2. It snows here every year (in/on) December. C. at seven fifteen
3. Michael is leaving on Friday (at/in) noon. 3. What time do I have a meeting with my boss?
4. Franco started working (at/in) the evening. A. at from nine to ten
B. at eleven to twelve
5. The last bus leaves tomorrow morning (at/in) C. from ten to eleven
8:00 a.m.
4. What time do I help my children with their homework?
6. We met at the restaurant at 6:30 and stayed A. at five thirty
(until/on) 10:30 p.m. B. at seven
C. at eight
Hands on! 4B Lesson core
For the next part of your project, you should know how Conociste como expresar las actividades más comunes
to say and write different kinds of activities that you que realizas durante un día completo con sus respectivas
perform regularly in a week or a month. Start making horas. También, practicaste como se pregunta a qué
a list of these activities. If you don’t know the words in hora realizas esas actividades cotidianas en Inglés,
así como escribirlas. Además, leíste acerca de varias
English, look them up in a dictionary! personas expresando sus actividades diarias que
realizan en un día y contestaste varias preguntas
acerca de esas actividades. Finalmente, practicaste
algunas preposiciones de tiempo que se utilizan
para decir la hora en que realizas las acciones o
actividades diarias.

UNIT 5
Self evaluation

1 Which of the following is not a daily

activity? 3 Which of the following questions are
incorrect?
a) What time does he starts to work?
a) have lunch
b) come back from work b) What time do they practice English?
c) brush your teeth c) What time does we take a bath?
d) go to parties d) What time do you listen to music?
2 Which of the following activities is

not performed in the morning? 4 Which of the following statements
are correct?
a) get up a) She wake up at eight.
b) wake up b) I take a shower at five.
c) have dinner c) He catch the bus before seven.
d) go to sleep at night d) They work from eight to five.
4. b, d 3.a, c 2. c, d 1. d Answers:
DAILY ROUTINES
Once people leave full-time education and start
working, the most common complaint seems to
be following the same daily routine: getting up
at the same time, getting to work at the same
time, eating lunch at the same time, leaving
work at about the same time, looking at the
same faces during the morning commute, etc.
Some people seem crushed by this. Holiday and
travel ads try to exploit this feeling with themes
of escape and freedom, and it’s fascinating to
watch a commuter take in one of these ads and
see the excitement in his face at the idea of a
break from his daily routine.

Unit Five Lesson 3
How often do you go out with
Getting started! your family?
¿Cuál es tu rutina diaria, semanal o mensual?
¿Cómo se expresa frecuencia en Inglés?
¿Elaboras un horario de actividades en tu vida social,

laboral y familiar?
¿Con que frecuencia planificas tus actividades semanales?
I can appropriately ask and answer questions dealing with daily I can accurately tell the frequency of some habitual activities in
routines and habits. El Salvador.
I can write an 8 to 10-line description of daily routines incorporating I can confidently exchange information about my daily schedule for
frequency adverbs and affirmative, negative and interrogative personal activities at home, work and school.
sentences in the present tense.
Which of the following words are adverbs of frequency? B: I’m sorry! Tell him to
1. never 2. habit 3. always 4. routine 5. sometimes have a romantic date
6. schedule 7. often with you. To keep love
alive, you know.
A: Yes, I totally agree with
Conversation and more you. I’ll tell him to plan
Listen to and read the following conversation carefully a date, only he and I.
and identify the adverbs of frequency. Look up any new B: That sounds better.
words in a dictionary. Well, I have to go.
Miguel is waiting for
A: Hi, Michele. Where are you going? me at Titanic’s.
B: Oh, hi Ana. I am going out to eat with my husband. A: Have a nice evening.
A: How about your daughter? I don’t see her. Is she B: Thanks a lot, Michele.
going with you?
B: No, my younger sister is going to babysit.
A: And how often do you go out with your husband?
B: We usually go out after payday.
A: Wow! I wish my husband could do the same.
Activity 1
B: What about you? How often do you go out Answer the following questions.
with John? 1. Who is going to eat out?
A: Well, we never go out alone. He always takes his
mother with us. 2. How often does she go out with her husband?
B: His mother? Is she living in your house? 3. How often do Ana and her husband go out alone?
A: No, but every time we decide to go out, he always 4. Who is going to babysit Michele’s daughter?
calls to invite her. 5. Where is Michele’s husband waiting for her?
Glossary:
Out to eat: eat in a restaurant.
Babysit: to take care of children.

UNIT 5

When people talk about their daily schedules or
weekly routines, they use time expressions. Adverbs of
Activity 2
frequency are used to indicate how often you do things.
Read and study the following chart containing Answer the following questions using frequency adverbs.
frequency words. Follow the examples below.
Example: What time do you get up on Sundays?
100% always Answer: I usually get up at nine on Sundays.
90% usually Example: When do you eat breakfast?
80% normally / generally Answer: I always eat breakfast at six thirty.
70% often / frequently
50% sometimes 1. What time do you go to bed on Saturday nights?
30% occasionally 2. Where do you study English on the weekdays?
10% seldom / rarely 3. When do you take a shower?
4. What time do you get up on Mondays?
5% hardly ever
5. Who do you eat dinner with on Sundays?
0% never
6. When do you watch TV?
7. How often do you exercise?
Study the following examples using adverbs of frequency.
1. I always brush my teeth before I go to bed.

(every night) What for?
2. I usually have toast for breakfast.
(happens most days but not every day)
Getting up at a good time is a great habit, especially
3. I frequently watch the news before dinner. for those with early schedules. You should set your
(it’s common but not every night) clock an hour and a half earlier than the time you
need to be at work. If your job starts at 7:00, then
4. I often go to the park with my dog. you should set your alarm for about 5:30 to give
(many times) yourself time to do things and avoid being late.
5. I sometimes go to church on Sundays.
(on particular occasions but not regularly)
6. I occasionally visit my hometown.
(not happening often or regularly)
7. I rarely drink coffee.
(it is not common and only on special occasions)
8. I seldom have a chance to go to the movies.
(almost never)
9. I hardly ever travel abroad.

(almost never)
10. I never work on weekends.
(not at any time or not on any occasion)

UNIT 5
Time to read
Listen to and read the following paragraph carefully.
Activity 3
1. Does Marcos like his job?
A. Yes, because he likes working at night.
B. No, because it’s difficult to stay up all night.
C. Yes, because he gets a lot of money.
2. Which duty is not in the paragraph?

A. checking the patients
B. writing reports
C. feeding the patients
3. Which word in the paragraph means “sick people”?

A. doctors
B. patients
C. nurses
4. How many hours does this nurse work each day?

A. nine
B. eight
C. ten
5. What does he usually do at 9 p.m.?

A. He takes a shower.
Marcos usually gets up at about 9 p.m. every day. He B. He goes to sleep.
rarely gets up earlier. He takes a hot shower, and then C. He gets up.
he eats breakfast and drinks hot chocolate. Sometimes
he drinks orange juice because it is healthier than hot
chocolate. He always begins work at 10 p.m. He is a 6. What does he generally do at 8:30 a.m.?
nurse, and he works the night shift. He likes it because the A. He eats breakfast.
hospital is quiet at night and most patients are sleeping. B. He listens to music.
Nurses check on the patients and help anyone who has a C. He gets home.
problem. There are hardly ever problems, but the nurses
need to talk about problems with the doctors. They also
write reports about the patients. Marcos often has lunch 7. What does he do at 2 p.m.?
at about 3 a.m. He drinks a big cup of black coffee. At A. He relaxes and has dinner.
7:30 a.m. the day nurses come in, and they talk about the B. He goes to bed.
patients with the night nurses. He generally gets off of C. He drinks a big cup of black coffee.
work at 8:00 and is home by 8:30 a.m. Then he relaxes
and has something to eat. He goes to bed at around 2
p.m. Most people think Marcos has a difficult lifestyle,
but he really likes staying up all night and sleeping in
Activity 4
the afternoon. Write your complete daily routine. Use adverbs of frequency and
approximate times. Use the previous paragraph as an example.
Glossary: Stay up: not sleep.

Quiet: silent.
Check on: make sure the patients are fine.

UNIT 5
Conversation 2
Conversation and more Listen to the following conversation carefully.
Conversation 1
A: What time do the local shops usually open here in
San Vicente?
B: They usually open between 9:00 and 10:00 a.m.
A: Do they open at the same time on Saturdays
and Sundays?
B: Yes, most of the shops open at the same time on
the weekends.
A: When do the local people eat dinner?
B: Most people eat dinner between 6 and 7 p.m.
A: Is lunch usually between noon and 1:00 p.m. or
between 1:00 and 2:00.
B: Lunch is always between noon and 1:00.
A: How often do they change the movies at the local
B:
movie theater?
Movies are usually changed once a week.
Activity 6
A: Do they show a lot of English language movies?
B: Many of the movies are the latest Hollywood Answer the following questions about conversation 2.
blockbusters, which are subtitled in Spanish.
A: How many times a week does the hotel clean the pool? 1. Is he free on Saturday?
B: The pool is cleaned every day, sometimes twice a 2. Does he see his grandmother on Sundays?
day depending on the circumstances.
A: What time is it usually cleaned? 3. What does he do on Sundays?
B: Usually early in the morning before the guests 4. Does his grandmother usually visit his parents?
wake up. 5. What does he usually do on Saturdays?
Activity 7
Match the questions on the left with their corresponding
answers on the right.
Questions Answers
1 What do you do A Yeah, almost always. But
on Saturdays? she sometimes visits my
cousins.
2 Really? Why? B First, I do my homework.
Then I always have
5 Activity soccer practice. After
that, I spend time with
my grandmother.
Answer the following questions about conversation 1. 3 Do you always see C I never do anything on
1. What time do the shops usually open? your grandmother Sundays.
on Saturdays?
2. What time do people eat dinner?
3. What do they usually do between 12 and 1p.m.? 4 What about D I am usually busy.
Sundays?
4. Does the local cinema show English movies?
5. When is the pool cleaned at the hotel?

UNIT 5

A timetable or schedule is an organized list, usually set
out in tabular form, providing information about a series
of arranged events. It particularly shows the time at which
planned events will take place.
To keep track of your daily routine during a week you can

use the following schedule:
Hours Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

6:00-7:00 work study swim work study
Read the following timetable carefully.

Person Time Monday Wednesday Saturday
John 8:00 a.m. works at the Grand studies plays baseball
Bank
Jim 12:00 a.m. studies has basketball works at the gym
practice
Luis 2:00 p.m. studies has soccer practice plays baseball
Manuel 4:00 p.m. works at the works out at the visits friends
supermarket gym
8 Activity

1. Who works at 8:00 a.m.? 3. What time does Manuel visit friends on Saturday?
A. Manuel A. 8:00
B. Jim B. 2:00
C. John C. 4:00
2. Who studies on Monday? 4. Who plays baseball on Saturday?

A. John and Manuel A. Jim and Manuel
B. Jim and Luis B. John and Luis
C. Luis and John C. Luis and John
9 Activity
Write your weekly routine in a schedule.
Hours Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

6:00-7:00

UNIT 5
Language in use
Position of adverbs of frequency in English
The basic rule is that adverbs of frequency go before a verb, except the verb “be”. Frequency adverbs go after the verb
“be” (am, is, are) and they go after auxiliaries “don’t” and “doesn’t”. The following tables show the position of the
adverbs of frequency.
A. Adverbs of frequency answering the question: How often . . . ?
Adverbs in affirmative sentences Adverbs in negative sentences

I always go to the supermarket. I don’t always go to the gym.
You often visit my grandparents. You don’t often visit the doctor.
She is sometimes at her mother’s house. She is never at her mother’s house.
We are rarely ready on time. We aren’t ever ready on time.
B. Adverbs of frequency in question forms.
Questions Answers
How often do you go to the movies? I almost always go there.
What time does he usually go to work? He usually goes to work at 8 o’clock.
Do they always study English? No, they never study English.
Do you frequently get up early on vacation? Yes, I frequently get up early.
Does she ever go to the gym? No, she never goes to the gym.
10 Activity
Place the following frequency adverbs in the sentences in the

correct position.
1. They watch TV in the afternoon. (never)
2. Pablo gets angry. (never)
3. Tomas is very friendly. (usually)
4. I take sugar in my coffee. (sometimes)
5. They read a book. (sometimes)
6. Cristina smokes in her house. (never)
7. William helps his father in the kitchen. (usually)
8. He listens to the radio. (often)
9. My grandfather goes for a walk in the evening.
(always)
10. Raul and Rosa are hungry. (often)

UNIT 5
6. Iris is not a pleasant person. She is __ in a bad mood.

11 Activity A. never
B. seldom
Choose the letter that best complements each statement. C. often
1. Carlos is an excellent student. He __ goes to class.

7. My sister usually drives to work with a friend. She __
A. always drives alone.
B. seldom A. never
C. never B. always
C. hardly ever
2. I hate vegetables. I __ eat carrots.
A. generally 8. I never lend money to Karla. She __ pays me back.
B. frequently A. sometimes
C. never B. never
C. usually
3. Rosa goes to the gym only two or three times a year.
She __ goes to the gym.
9. Susan goes to the beach whenever she can. She __
A. never misses a chance to go there.
B. usually A. rarely
C. seldom B. often
C. frequently
4. Jaime never leaves the college on Friday. He __ eats
at the cafeteria on Fridays.
A. always
B. never Hands on! 4C
C. seldom
For the third part of your project, make a time
table or schedule for you to distribute and organize
5. Ms. Ayala is usually in a good mood. She is __ sad. your daily and weekly activities that you have
A. normally planned for a month.
B. generally
C. rarely
Lesson core
12 Activity
Conociste diferentes formas de expresar las
actividades que con frecuencia realizas durante
Rewrite the following statements by adding a frequency adverb la semana. También, aprendiste a escribir
that makes each statement true for you. y responder con qué frecuencia haces las
1. I play video games in the morning. actividades cotidianas, así como pronunciar los
adverbios que se utilizan para tan fin. Finalmente,
2. My family goes to the beach. practicaste como pronunciar estos adverbios
3. My friends play soccer on Sundays. de tiempo y escribir tus actividades habituales
4. I watch TV at night. durante una semana.
5. I practice sports on vacation.

UNIT 5
Self evaluation

1 Which of the following words is not

an adverb of frequency? 3 Which adverb of frequency expresses
one hundred percent?
a) never a) usually
b) today b) frequently
c) always c) almost always
d) sometimes d) always
2 Which adverb of frequency

expresses zero percent? 4 Which of the following statements
are incorrect?
a) She always is very angry.
a) always
b) seldom b) She never goes to parties.
c) never c) Mike sometimes doesn’t go to
d) rarely
work on Saturdays.
d) They usually visit me on the
weekends.
4. a, c 3. d 2. c 1. b Answers:
TOURISM
Tourists who visit new cities, foreign countries

or touristic places and stay in hotels may
sometimes ask hotel staff the general routine
of the area they are visiting. Tourists may ask,
for example, when local shops usually open
and close, when the months of the high or low
seasons are, what time it gets dark and light
outside, or the times that local people usually
eat meals. These routines are important for
tourists so they can blend in and make the most
of their time.

Unit Five Lesson 4
What are your favorite hobbies?
Getting started!
¿ Cuáles son tus pasatiempos favoritos?

¿Qué haces en tu tiempo libre?
¿Qué actividades realizas para entretenerte?
¿Cuáles actividades deportivas culturales o sociales realizas?
I can eagerly ask and answer questions about hobbies and I can list peoples’ favorite hobbies and recreational activities by
recreational activities. categories and with the correct spelling.`
I can skim a text about hobbies and leisure time activities.
Are any of these activities your favorite hobbies?

1. collecting things 2. reading a book 3. practicing a sport 4. dancing 5. surfing the net
Conversation and more A: I learned to do it when I worked in Ilobasco.

Listen to and read the following conversation, and B: That’s nice.
identify the hobbies that are talked about. Look up any A: If you want, I can teach you how to make figures
new words in a dictionary. with clay and you can teach me how to
make origami.
A: Good evening! B: That’s a deal! We can begin next weekend.
B: Hi, Gloria. Come on in. A: Okay. You teach me origami on Saturday
A: Thanks. Hey! What’s that? What are you mornings, and I can teach you on
doing, Iris? Saturday afternoons.
B: Oh. This is origami. It’s my favorite hobby. B: No problem!
A: Ori… what?
B: Origami! It’s the Japanese art of folding paper into
shapes representing objects. Flowers or birds
for example.
Activity 1
A: Wow! That’s awesome. Where did you learn to
do that? Answer the following questions according to the previous
B: I learned when I worked with a Japanese family in conversation.
San Salvador last month. How about you? What is 1. What is Gloria’s favorite hobby?
your favorite hobby?
2. What is Iris’ favorite hobby?
A: I like to make figures with clay.
B: Hey! I didn’t know that. Where did you learn to 3. What is origami?
do that? 4. Where did Iris learn to make origami?
Glossary: Worked: the past tense of “work”.
Folding: double. Teach: to instruct or train.
Did and didn’t: the auxiliaries used to express past time.

UNIT 5

Outside of school and work, many people enjoy
spending their free time doing hobbies or other Choose the letter that best answers each question using the
recreational activities. Hobbies can provide ways to pictures to help you.
develop our talents, relieve stress, and even get exercise.
Look at the following list of common activities
or hobbies. 1. What does she like to do
Listen to and repeat each activity out loud. in her spare time?
A. She likes cycling.
camping B. She likes painting.
hiking C. She likes photography.
swimming
surfing
shopping 2. What does she like to do in her spare time?
bowling A. She likes shopping.
roller skating B. She likes listening to music.
jogging/running C. She likes watching TV.
playing video games
surfing the internet
reading a book
collecting coins/stamps
playing soccer
practicing martial arts
listening to music
gardening
3. What does he like to do
in his spare time?
A. He likes playing football.
B. He likes dancing.
C. He likes fishing.
4. What do they like to do in their spare time?

A. They like playing soccer.
B. They like playing basketball.
C. They like eating pupusas.

UNIT 5
Time to read
One of my favorite hobbies is origami, or Japanese paper
folding. Origami is the art of folding paper in different
ways to make beautiful objects such as a bird, box, frog,
or balloon. The origin of origami dates back hundreds
of years, and origami is still a popular pastime today. You
can either use origami paper specifically designed for
paper folding, or you can use ordinary paper. There are
several keys to doing origami correctly. First, you should
use a very flat surface to create your origami shapes to get
Activity 4
the best results. Next, you should follow the directions
carefully for making any object. Otherwise, your shape Answer the following questions with your own information.
or design might not turn out the correct way. Next, be
sure to make strong creases in the paper with a fingernail 1. Do you have hobbies?
when folding the paper. This will help make sure that the 2. What are you favorite hobbies?
paper folds always line up. Furthermore, use scissors to 3. How often do you practice them?
cut your paper into the desired shape before beginning. 4. Do your family members have any hobbies?
Sometimes I create origami objects to give away as gifts
to friends and family. 5. Would you like to learn origami?
6. What do you do you in your free time?
3 Activity
Choose the letter that best answers each question. 5. Who does the narrator sometimes give the origami to?
A. friends
1. Where is origami originally from?
B. family
A. El Salvador
C. A and B
B. Japan
C. USA
6. What is origami?
A. the art of folding cardboard in different ways to
2. What kind of paper can you use to make the objects? make beautiful objects
A. ordinary paper B. the art of folding paper in different ways to make
B. origami paper beautiful objects
C. A and B C. the art of folding plastic in different ways to make
a beautiful object
3. How many ways are there to do origami?
A. one
B. several
C. tons Don’t forget!
4. What can you use to cut the paper?

Hobbies are practiced for interest and enjoyment rather
than to earn money. Engaging in a hobby can lead
A. only your hands to acquiring new skills, knowledge, and experience.
B. scissors However, personal fulfillment is the ultimate goal.
C. A and B
Glossary: Otherwise: if not.

Dates back: the time something began or originated. Turn out: produce or make.
Designed: intended to do something. Creases: folds.
Flat: a level or plane. Line up: to assemble or gather together.

UNIT 5

and practice it out loud. Look up any new words in
a dictionary.
A: Hey, Miguel. I hear you and your girlfriend are

really getting serious in your relationship.
B: Yeah, Alex. And I am pretty sure she’ll be
impressed with my new exercise program.
A: What? What are you talking about? What
exercise program?
B: Well, you know, I enjoy staying in shape as a
hobby. First, I usually get up every morning
at 5:00 a.m.
A: Oh, yeah. Since when? You never wake up early.
B: No, no, I’m serious. I began last week.
A: Ah, not another one of your unbelievable stories.
B: Well, I almost always go jogging for about a half
hour, you know, to increase my energy.
A: Maybe jogging to the refrigerator for a glass
of milk!
B: No, it’s true. Before I leave, I usually make sure I do
A:
some stretches so I don’t pull a muscle on my run.
Right. One jumping jack!
Activity 5
B: Come on! I usually lift weights on Tuesdays and
Thursdays for about an hour after work. Choose the letter that best answers each question.
A: Oh.
1. Who has a new exercise program?
B: This really helps me build muscle strength.
A: Okay, if you say so. A. Miguel
B: Also, I often go hiking on Saturdays with my B. Alex
brother. I like hiking because it helps me reduce C. A and B
stress and anxiety that builds up during the week.
A: Oh yeah, those lies.
B: As for Fridays, sometimes I just relax at home by 2. What time does he usually get up?
watching a movie or inviting you over to visit. A. seven
A: If I buy the pizza. B. eight
B: And on Sundays, I take the day off from exercising.
But I usually take my dog for a walk. C. five
3. When does he go hiking?

Hands on! 4D A. Saturday
B. Sunday
C. Tuesday
For the fourth part of your project, include in your
agenda all hobbies, free time and leisure activities
that you like to do regularly in a week or month. 4. What does he do on Friday?
A. watch a movie
B. lift weights
C. hike
Glossary: Strength: power or potency.
Unbelievable: incredible or difficult to believe. Build up: to increase or amplify.
Stretch: to extend. Day off: free day.
Lift: to elevate or pick up.

UNIT 5
Time to read
Read the following article carefully. Look up any new
Centuries ago people didn’t have much free time

because everybody was working too hard. In Britain in
the nineteenth century, people had more spare time. But
because the Victorians hated relaxing and doing nothing,
they invented football, rugby and cricket. People took up
more gentle activities too, like gardening, bird-watching
and train spotting. It was even possible simply to watch
a sport and give the impression that you were actually
doing something. Gradually, leisure activities have
become less and less demanding and most people have
a variety of more or less energetic interests and hobbies.
But now there is a new type of person who thinks
that lying on the sofa watching television on Sunday
afternoon or reading the newspaper from cover to
cover is the most exciting activity they can manage. This
is the twentieth-century couch potato! For them, every
activity is too much trouble and laziness is an art form!
Activity 7
So how do you spend your free time? Are you a Decide which hobby each description is about. Use the words
couch potato? given below.
chess jogging shopping
sewing saxophone photography
6 Activity 1. I usually use color, but sometimes you get a better

effect with black and white. It really depends on
the subject.
Decide whether the following statements are true or false. 2. I really enjoy going around to the shops and
markets looking for a bargain.
1. Centuries ago people didn’t have much free time. 3. I try to practice every day, but sometimes it’s
2. In Britain, Victorians invented football, rugby difficult because I don’t like to disturb my
and cricket. neighbors. And one neighbor gets very angry if I play
3. People took up more gentle activities too, like the same thing over and over again!
gardening and bird-watching. 4. The great thing is you can do it when you like. I
4. Leisure activities have not become less and usually do it three or four times a week, either early
less demanding. in the morning or after school. I only go for about
25 minutes but it really keeps me fit.
5. For couch potatoes, every activity is not too
much trouble. 5. Obviously it saves me a lot of money. And in any
case, I hate buying things in boutiques because so
many clothing items are badly made.
6. I joined a club because I wanted to get better, and I
now play twice a week in the evenings. It has helped
me a lot and I have a much better memory for all the
different moves and strategies.
Glossary: Took up: the past tense form of “take up” which means engage in.
Centuries: hundreds of years. Become: turn out to be.
Had: the past tense of “have”. Lying: reclined or stretched out.
Victorians: people from the Victorian era of the United Kingdom.

UNIT 5
Language in use
A. When expressing some hobbies and free time
activities, you can use the following verbs:
Activity 8
To go + activity To play + sport
Listen to the response made by someone when asked,
to go camping to play basketball “What are your hobbies?” and then choose the letter that
to go climbing to play billiards best answers each question.
to go dancing to play chess
1. What is his favorite sport?
to go fishing to play football
A. tennis
to go hunting to play hockey
B. football
to go on a picnic to play the drums
C. cycling
to go bowling to play the guitar
to go skating to play the piano
2. Which sport does he hate?
to go shopping to play tennis
A. tennis
to go swimming to play with the computer
B. football
to go walking
C. cycling
Read and study the following examples:
I go camping on the weekends. 3. Which other activity does he like?
You play soccer with your friends. A. walking
My sister goes shopping on Saturdays. B. going to the movies
They play the guitar.
C. going to the supermarket
We go dancing on Friday nights.
B. When expressing which hobbies you like and dislike, 4. Which other activity does he dislike?
you can use the following verbs: A. cycling
B. going to the supermarket
Verbs Verbs + ing (activities) C. going to the movies
like, love, enjoy She loves going on a picnic.
He likes going to clubs.
They enjoy going ice skating.
dislike, detest, hate I dislike playing basketball.
You detest playing billiards.
They hate going bowling.
C. When asking about free time activities or hobbies,

you can use the following questions:
Questions Answers
What do you do in your free time? I usually play video games.
What is your favorite hobby? My favorite hobby is jogging.
Do you like collecting coins? Yes, I like collecting them.
What do you like doing in your spare time? I like listening to music and dancing.

UNIT 5
Write original sentences expressing preferences for the
Listen to the following statements, and then choose the following hobbies. Follow the examples below.
hobby that is described.
Example: go swimming
What hobbies are they talking about? My brother dislikes going swimming.
1. A. gardening
B. hiking Example: play football
C. swimming I like playing football.
1. go to the movies
2. A. reading 2. play basketball
B. swimming 3. go jogging
C. painting 4. play chess
5. go hiking
3. A. golf 6. do karate
B. bike riding 7. surf the internet
C. swimming
4. A. painting Activity 11
B. chess
C. reading
Listen to and repeat the following questions, and then
answer them with your own information.
5. A. photography
B. hiking 1. What do you do in your free time?
C. bird watching 2. What is your favorite hobby?
3. Do you like playing video games?
6. A. golf 4. What do you like doing in your spare time?
B. gardening 5. What do you dislike doing?
C. photography 6. Do you watch TV every day?
7. A. chess
B. bicycling Lesson core
C. gardening
Conociste diferentes actividades que se pueden
8. A. reading realizar en tu tiempo libre. Además, practicaste
B. sleeping la pronunciación de diversos pasatiempos en
C. watching TV ingles, asi como se escriben y se usan en contexto.
También, estudiaste los verbos que se pueden
utilizar en combinación con algunas pasatiempos,
9. A. painting y practicaste como elaborar preguntas que se
B. drawing realizan para conocer los pasatiempos favoritos
C. photography de otras personas. Finalmente, leíste y escuchaste
acerca de varias actividades que realizan otras
personas en sus tiempos libres.

UNIT 5
Self evaluation
1 Which of the following activities is

not a traditional indoor activity? 3 Which of the following statements are
incorrect?
a) surfing the internet a) She go hiking every Sunday.
b) watching a movie b) He hates play softball.
c) swimming c) They dislike dancing.
d) playing computer games d) We like going shopping.
2 Which of the following activities is not a

traditional outdoor activity? 4 Which of the following questions are
correct?
a) What is your favorite pastime activity?
a) playing soccer
b) going jogging b) Do you like go swimming?
c) going to a night club c) What does she dislikes doing?
d) running d) What are their favorite hobbies?
4. a, d 3. a, b 2. c 1.c Answers:
LOVE FOR FOOD
Food as a hobby? People love to eat. Some

people consider food their hobby because they
are lovers of different cuisines from around
the world and love trying new food. Some
people express their love for food in different
ways. Some people have their own restaurant
or cafe where they can prepare lovely, creative
dishes and serve them to their clients.Others
express their love for food by being a food critic,
writing about different cuisines, and getting
them published in online journals, magazines,
or newspapers.

Unit Five Lesson 5
What did you do last weekend?
Getting started!
Q
¿ ué actividades recuerdas que hiciste en tu
niñez o juventud?
¿Cómo expresas actividades en tiempo pasado
en Inglés?
¿Cuáles son los verbos regulares e irregulares
en Inglés?
¿Cómo se pronuncian los verbos regulares e
irregulares en pasado simple en Inglés?
I can narrate an exciting experience in the past, using the correct I can write a 6 to 8-line paragraph describing a perfect day I had, with
form of the most common regular and irregular verbs and the right unity, correct spelling and the accurate use of the past tense.
intonation to communicate meaning.
I can correctly pronounce the phonemes /t/, /d/, and /id/ of the
regular past tense.
Which of the following verbs are in the past tense form?
1. stay 2. went 3. enjoyed 4. play 5. invite 6. saw 7. go 8. was 9. do 10. said

A: Hi, Saul. How was your vacation?
B: Hi, Frank. It was wonderful and unforgettable!
A: Really? Where did you g o?
B: We went to El Refugio River.
A: Where is that?
B: It’s in La Palma, Chalatenango.
A: I didn’t know that. What is it like?
B: The river is long and very cold, and it has crystal
clear water. Activity 1
A: Wow! What did you do there?
B: We went camping and swimming in the river. We Answer the following questions.
also went hiking.
A: And what else did you do?
1. Whose vacation was wonderful?
B: Well, at lunch we had a barbeque. Later we took many 2. Where did he go?
pictures of the river, mountains, and my family. 3. Where is it located?
A: That’s why you said it was wonderful 4. What did he do there?
and unforgettable. 5. What did he do after lunch?
Glossary: Had: the past tense of “has”.

Was: the past tense form of “is”. Took: the past tense of “take”.
Unforgettable: memorable. Said: the past tense of “say” which means speak.
Else: in addition.
UNIT 5
Language in use
Simple past tense
Use the simple past to express the idea that an action that started and finished at a specific time in the past. In English
there are regular and irregular verbs. Regular past tense verbs are formed by adding –ed to the end of a verb. If the verb
already ends in –e, just add a –d. Regular verbs in past tense have three ending pronunciations.
Listen to and repeat each verb out loud.
Voiceless sounds: – p – k – s – ch Voiced sounds: – l – v – n – m – r Verbs ending with T or D
– sh – f – x – h – pronounce “ed” – b – v – g – w – y – z – and vowel sounds, pronounce “ed”
as /t/ sounds pronounce “ed” as /d/ as /id/
brush brushed allow allowed attend attended
cook cooked answer answered collect collected
dance danced arrive arrived count counted
dress dressed call called decide decided
fix fixed change changed end ended
help helped clean cleaned expect expected
jump jumped decribe described hate hated
kiss kissed earn earned invite invited
laugh laughed enjoy enjoyed need needed
pass passed happen happened present presented
push pushed listen listened protect protected
pronounce pronounced live lived rent rented
relax relaxed love loved repeat repeated
stop stopped open opened respect respected
shop shopped plan planned rest rested
talk talked play played skate skated
walk walked stay stayed shout shouted
wash washed study studied visit visited
Write ten sentences about what you did last weekend using
verbs in the simple past tense. Listen to and classify the following regular verbs
according to their –ed pronunciation.
Verbs /t/ /d/ /id/ Verbs /t/ /d/ /id/

invited listened
missed kissed
loved graduated
wanted worked
talked cleaned

UNIT 5
Time to read
Read the following passage taken from “Gratitude: It’s A
Perfect Day” by Carol Guy
carefully. Look up any new words in a dictionary.
Today I woke up at 6:00 a.m. and headed to the gym.

I took my dog Michael with me because the gym is in
a park. I thought we could run first. It was so beautiful
outside. The air was cool and fresh. The park was full
of runners, walkers, bikers and dogs. It was nice to see
so many people out enjoying nature and taking care of
themselves.
Michael and I had a great run, and then he waited in the

car for me while I worked out. It was cool enough for
him to do so and I was grateful. I don’t normally take him
with me due to the weather. I had a great workout and
then decided to take Michael for a walk around the lake
and meditate. The weather was so “perfect” I just wanted
to enjoy it. We had been having 90-100 degree weather
lately, so today felt nice.
As I meditated, all I could think was “It Was A Perfect

Day”. I was enjoying the gift of a cool day, taking care of
my body and Michael’s, and connecting with nature.
I couldn’t think of a better way to start the day. It was a
blessing to enjoy this great gift that was being given. I
even started singing to myself “It’s a perfect day.”
All day seemed to be just that. I took my time to enjoy Activity 4

the day. It stayed cool outside with a few clouds but I
was like a kid enjoying every moment of the day. During Decide whether the following statements are true or false.
the middle of the day, something flowed in that wanted
to steal my perfect day from me but I stopped it in its 1. Today she woke up at 6:00 a.m. and headed to
tracks. It was something that I had to change my thinking the market.
about. I made a choice to say “NO” and continue having
a perfect day. 2. The weather was so “perfect” she just wanted to
enjoy it.
When you really take the time, the little things are what 3. She started singing to herself “It’s a terrible day.”
make a day perfect. Tomorrow and the rest of this week, 4. When you really take the time, it is not the little
see if you can make a perfect day. Take the time to make things that make it a perfect day.
all of your days perfect or find something great that you
can make perfect just by being with it. 5. You should take the time to make all of your
days perfect.
Glossary: Due: because of.

Headed: went, the past tense od “go”. Being given: provided.
Thought: the past tense of “think”. Flowed: run.

UNIT 5

Listen to the following conversation carefully.
Activity 6
1. How old was John when he came to El Salvador?
A. five
B. six
C. seven
2. Where are John’s parents from?

A. El Salvador
B. Spain
C. America
3. What did they do in Costa Rica?

A. They worked as teachers.
B. They took specialized courses.
5 Activity
C. They worked as translators.
4. Did they work in El Salvador?

A. yes
Listen to the passage again, and then put the following B. no
statements in the correct order. C. It doesn’t say.
__ That’s right, as English teachers.
__ It was in order to help developing countries train 5. What did they do in Europe?
professionals. In this case, training them how to
teach the English language. A. They studied specialized courses.
__ Yeah. I was about six. B. They worked in Spain.
C. A and B
__ And your parents, are they Salvadorans?
__ How do you spell that?
__ E-D-U-C-A-M-E.
__ Ok. Hands on! 4E
__ So they worked in Costa Rica as teachers?
__ Yeah. Teaching teachers how to teach. For example,
they taught methodology. For the last part of your project, include a section
__ Teacher trainers, right? Okay. for evaluating your schedule. This should be
__ And then they went to Europe. done at the end of every day or week to make the
__ Yes, they went there. necessary changes in things that went wrong and
__ They were doing the same thing in Europe? that can be improved or modified for future events
__ Yes, in Europe they studied some specialized courses, or activities.
and then they worked for one year in Spain.
__ They are both Americans. They were trained as
teachers in the U.S., and they joined the government
program called Educame in El Salvador.
__ So, John, you came to El Salvador when you were
about six years old?

UNIT 5
Study the following examples:

1. I was in Zacatecoluca last weekend.
Enrich your Vocabulary 2. You went to El Pital last month.
Past tense of irregular verbs 3. She bought some souvenirs for her family.
The past form for irregular verbs is variable. You need to 4. The store opened at seven in the morning.
memorize them. Study this list of common irregular verbs. 5. We took many pictures in La Palma.
Listen to and repeat each irregular verb out loud. 6. They ate tamales at the festival.
Present tense Past tense Present tense Past tense

be was, were have had
become became hear heard
begin began keep kept
break broke know knew
bring brought leave left
build built make made
buy bought meet met
cath caught pay paid
choose chose read read
come came ride rode
cut cut run ran
do did say said
drink drank see saw
drive drove sell sold
eat ate send sent
fall fell sit sat
feed fed sleep slept
feel felt speak spoke
fight fought spend spent
find found swim swan
fly flew take took
forget forgot teach taught
forgive forgave tell told
feeze froze think thought
get got understand understood
give gave wake woke
go went wear wore
grow grew write wrote
Write the past tense of the following irregular verbs. Write ten original sentences about what you did last week
using irregular verbs in the past tense.
1. drive 4. do
2. fly 5. teach
3. grow 6. make

UNIT 5
Language in use
Simple past tense
A. Affirmative and negative statements.
To make the negative forms of past tense use the auxiliary “did not” or the contracted form “didn’t” after all of the
subjects and the verb in the base form. Study the table below.
Affirmative sentences Negative sentences
I visited many places on my last vacation. I didn’t visit many places on my last vacation.
You went to Suchitoto last week. You didn’t go to Suchitoto last week.
He studied English to work in the U.S. He didn’t study English to work in the U.S.
She played softball last night. She didn’t play softball last night.
We saw many people in that place. We didn’t see many people in that place.
B. Yes/ No questions
To make Yes/No questions, put the auxiliary “did” at the beginning with the base form of the verb. Study the table below.
Auxiliary Subject Verb Complement Affirmative and negative answers
Did you go to the U.S.? Yes, I did. I went to the U.S.
No, I didn’t. I didn’t go the U.S.
Did she see her friends? Yes, she did. She saw her friends.
No, she didn’t. She didn’t see her friends.
Did they watch the movie? Yes, they did. They watched the movie.
No, they didn’t. They didn’t watch the movie.
C. Information questions
To make Wh- word questions, put the question words first and then the auxiliary “did”. Study the table with
examples below.
Question word Auxiliary Subject Verb Complement Answers
What did you do last week? I visited my family in Gotera.
Where did she go on vacation? She went to New York.
When did he come here? He came here last month.
Why did we eat that? Because we were hungry.
How did they travel to El Pital? They traveled by bus.
9 Activity
Fill in the blanks using the question and negative form of the 1. __ you __ dinner at 7 o´clock? (question: to eat)
past tense. 2. Michele __ __ her homework. (negative:
to finish)
Example: __ Liz __ at 5 o’clock?
3. __ Boris at the office late? (question: to be)
(question: to take a bath)
4. I __ __ you when I arrived home.
Answer: Does Liz take a bath at 5 o’clock? (negative: to call)
Example: They __ to the meeting. 5. __ Alice __ you at the restaurant ?(question:to see)
(negative: to come)
Answer: They didn’t come to the meeting.

UNIT 5
Fill in the blanks with the correct past tense forms of the Write your own sentences in past tense using the following
following verbs. information. Follow the examples below.
Yesterday I _(1. do)_ not have much fun. I _(2. go)_ for a Examples: question: to go
bike ride around three in the afternoon. Some guy Did you go to San Miguel yesterday?
_(3. come)_ up behind me and _(4. say)_, “I bet you negative: to sleep
twenty bucks I can beat you in a race.” I _(5. say)_, “No She didn’t sleep last night.
way!” and we _(6. take)_ off. 1. question: to drink
I never _(7. see)_ the old lady crossing the street. She
_(8. have)_ a cane and _(9. be)_ really slow. When I 2. negative: to work
_(10. hit)_ her, we both _(11. go)_ flying. I _(12. fly)_ 3. negative: to study
about ten feet and _(13. land)_ on my face. 4. question: to have
The guy I was racing _(14. know)_ I was hurt, but he 5. question: to drink
_(15. ask)_ me for the twenty bucks anyway.
I _(16. tell)_ him to go call an ambulance but he kept
saying, “I _(17. win)_.” Finally, I _(18. give)_ him the
money and he _(19. go)_ and _(20. make)_ the call.
Activity 13
Listen to repeat the following questions, and then
11 Activity answer them with your own information.
1. Did you go out yesterday?
Complete the sentences using the simple past tense of the 2. What did you do yesterday morning?
following verbs. 3. What did your family do last weekend?
rain study arrive open see 4. What was the best day last month? Why?
What happened?
play call greet want live
5. Did you do anything interesting last Friday?
end fix close
1. Yesterday morning, I __ the Christmas lights.
2. We __ a movie last night.
Lesson core
3. My sister __ me from Japan.
4. When I was a child, I __ to be a movie star.
Conociste dos diferentes clases de verbos
5. My father __ soccer last Sunday. en Inglés: regulares e irregulares. Además,
6. Luis __ English in school. practicaste la pronunciación y escritura de los
7. When we __at the party, everyone __ us. verbos irregulares, los cuales tienen formas
diferentes tanto en presente como en el pasado.
8. The room was so hot that we __ the window to get
También, estudiante los verbos regulares, los
some air. cuales tienen tres formas de pronunciar el sonido
9. The Martinez family __ in California for 3 years. final en el pasado simple. Finalmente, aprendiste
10. The concert __ at 10:30 p.m. a elaborar y responder preguntas utilizando el
11. She __ the door after the last guest left.
auxiliar “did” que se utiliza para expresar tiempo
pasado simple en Inglés.
12. It was a terrible weekend. It __ the entire time.

UNIT 5
Self evaluation

regular verbs? 3 Which of the following statements
is incorrect?
a) be a) I did not visited my family in Sonsonate.
b) want b) She went to Tazumal.
c) have c) They traveled to Mexico.
d) play d) He ate two big tamales.

irregular verbs? 4 Which of the following questions
are incorrect?
a) see a) What did you did on Monday?
b) cry b) Did she take a lot of pictures?
c) eat c) Where they went on vacation?
d) think d) Did he stay in a hotel?
4. a, c 3. a 2. b 1. a, c Answers:
PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE
What effect does your past have on your

future? Most of us base the majority of today’s
decisions on our experiences from the past. We
learn things from our past and we make today’s
decisions based on those lessons learned. Using
lessons we have learned in the past can be a
good thing if it helps us to grow. The only time
that people around the world should look back
to yesterday is to look at the positive things that
were accomplished to encourage us to do better
things today, tomorrow and in the future.

Answer Key
Lesson 1 Lesson 3
Activity 1: 1. Julio 2. No, he doesn’t. 3. It’s 8 o’clock. Activity 1: 1. Michele and her husband 2. usually
4. at eight thirty 5. 25th Avenue North after payday 3. never 4. her younger sister
Activity 2: 1 . F 2. E 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. A 5. at Titanic’s
Activity 3: 1. False 2. False 3. True 4. True 5. True Activity 2: Answers may vary.
Activity 4: 1. Chalatenango 2. at 6 a.m. 3. at 4 p.m. 4. in Activity 3: 1. A 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. C 6. C 7. B
the afternoon Activity 4: Answers may vary.
Activity 5: Answers may vary. Activity 5: 1. between 9 and 10 2. between 6 to 7
Activity 6: 1. 11:30 a.m. 2. yes 3. at the Salvatrout 3. They eat lunch. 4. yes 5. early in
4. Yes, they do. 5. on foot the morning
Activity 7: 1. 1:15 2. 7:25 3. 2:45 4. 3:00 5. 10:40 Activity 6: 1. no 2. no 3. He doesn’t do anything. 4. no
6. 8:05 7. 3:55 8. 11:20 9. 2:10 10. 12:00 5. He does his homework, has soccer practice,
and spends time with his grandmother.
Activity 8: Possible answers: 1. seven o’clock 2. ten after
eight 3. twenty-five past nine 4. ten thirty Activity 7: 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. C
5. twenty to twelve 6. twenty- five to one Activity 8: 1. C 2. B 3. C 4. B
7. five to two 8. five past two 9. a quarter after
three 10. a quarter to five Activity 9: Answers may vary.
Activity 9: 1. F 2. G 3. C 4. D 5. A 6. B 7. E Activity 10: 1. They never watch TV in the afternoon.
Activity 10: 1. A 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. B 8. C 2. Pablo never gets angry. 3. Tomas is usually
very friendly. 4. I sometimes take sugar in
Activity 11: Answers may vary. my coffee. 5. They sometimes read a book.
6. Cristina never smokes in her house.
7. William usually helps his father in the
kitchen. 8. He often listens to the radio.
9. My grandfather always goes for a walk in the
Lesson 2 evening. 10. Raul and Rosa are often hungry.
Activity 1: 1. Carlos 2. his grandma 3. at 7:30 4. Yes, it is. Activity 11: 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. C 6. C 7. C 8. B 9. A
Activity 3: 1. F 2. E 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. A
Activity 4: 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. C
Activity 5: 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. C
Activity 6: Answers may vary. Lesson 4
Activity 7: 1. F 2. E 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. A
Activity 1: 1. to make figures with clay 2. origami
Activity 8: 1. E 2. C 3. D 4. F 5. B 6. A 7. G 3. The Japanese art of folding paper into
Activity 9: Answers may vary. shapes. 4. in San Salvador with a
Activity 10: 1. at 2. in 3. at 4. in 5. at 6. until Japanese family
Activity 11: 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. B Activity 2: 1.A 2.B 3.C 4.C

Answer Key
Activity 3: 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. C 6. B
Activity 10: 1. did 2. went 3. came 4. said 5. said 6.took
7. saw 8. had 9. was 10. hit 11. went 12. flew
Activity 5: 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. A 13. landed 14. knew 15. asked 16. told
Activity 6: 1. True 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. False 17. won 18. gave 19. went 20. made
Activity 7: 1. photography 2. shopping 3. saxophone Activity 11: 1. fixed 2. saw 3. called 4. wanted 5. played
4. jogging 5. sewing 6. chess 6. studied 7. arrived, greeted 8. opened
Activity 8: 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. B 9. lived 10. ended 11. closed 12. rained
Activity 9: 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. C 8. A 9. C Activity 12: Answers may vary.
Lesson 5
Activity 1: 1. Saul’s 2. El Refugio River 3. La Palma,
Chalatenango 4. He went camping,
swimming in the river, and hiking. 5. He took
many pictures of the river, mountains, and
his family.
Activity 3: /t/: missed, talked, kissed, worked; /d/:

loved, listened, cleaned; /id/: invited,
wanted, graduated
Activity 4: 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. True
Activity 5: 12, 8, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16,
4, 1
Activity 6: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. C
Activity 7: 1. drove 2. flew 3. grew 4. did 5. taught
6. made
Activity 9: 1. Did you eat dinner at 7o´clock ? 2. Michele
didn’t finish her homework. 3. Was Boris at
the office late? 4. I did not call you when I
arrived home. 5. Did Alice see you at
the restaurant?

Hands on!
“My monthly agenda”
Purpose
description of your weekly schedule for a month. In it you will include all of the activities or events that you
perform in that period of time.
Theory and practice

The different phases of the unit 5 project (from Hands on! 4A to Hands on! 4E) gave you ideas on how to
understand the concepts or sections which are included in the description of a monthly agenda.
With these different project phases, you should have kept track of key elements or aspects to have a clear picture
of which different parts of a weekly schedule should be included in your project.
Development
You should have noticed that when completing different activities, you were gaining or obtaining the basic
knowledge to create a simple description of your monthly agenda or schedule.
Remember or take a look again at the activities which gave you some good practice and an idea on how to write
or what to include in your project.
The activities provided you with good background, and with this you will be able to perform or do your project
efficiently.
Wrap up
To complete the unit 5 project, fill out the sections of your weekly schedule with the activities that you will
perform in a month. Keep this template in mind and complete it with more information, as it will help you on
future projects. You may also want to include some pictures or photos of events that you attended.
Study the following chart as a reference for the project of weekly agenda for a month. You can add more elements
if you want or create one on your own.

Resources
For use of a bilingual dictionary:

For the complete article on “How to Deal with Time Differences When You Live
Abroad”:
http://www.canuckabroad.com/living-abroad/how-to-deal-with-time-differences-when-you-live-abroad
For more about telling the time in English:

http://www.teachingtime.co.uk/
For more practice with daily activities:

http://www.teachersdesk.com/lessons/esl/Daily%20Activities/daily_activities__esl_lessons.htm
http://www.tolearnenglish.com/exercises/exercise-english-2/exercise-english-40212.php
For more on adverbs of frequency:

http://www.english-zone.com/verbs/freq-adv01.html
http://www.1-language.com/englishcourse/unit23_index.htm
For more on hobbies and entertainment:

http://www.esl-galaxy.com/vocabularysheets.html
For more practice with the simple past tense:

http://eslbears.homestead.com/Contact_Info.html
For the complete article on “Gratitude: It’s A Perfect Day”:

http://www.selfgrowth.com/articles/its_a_perfect_day.html
For more on time zones:

http://wwp.greenwichmeantime.com/time-zone/usa/

Ingles 7° Grado

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Ingles 7° Grado

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ENGLISH

Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Lesson 4 Lesson 5

Introduction: Hands on!

http://jobsearch.aboutk.com/ od/ jobappsample/a/printableapp.htm.

192 English - Seventh Grade

Which of the following are greetings?

Conversation and more

There are formal and informal greetings in English. “How

Glossary: By the way: used to introduce another topic.

Seventh Grade - English 193

Enrich your vocabulary Activity 2

4. A: How are you?

5. A: What is your name?

6. A: What is your last name?

When you find yourself among people you

194 English - Seventh Grade

Time to read Conversation and more

A: What’s up, Paula?

Choose the letter that best answers the following questions

2. Who is in Paula’s house?

Seventh Grade - English 195

Conversation and more

196 English - Seventh Grade

Enrich your vocabulary

Formal greetings: Informal greetings: Conversation 3

Seventh Grade - English 197

Subject Verb in a question Contractions Verb in a question

Question word + “be” Contraction Question word + “be” Contraction

1. He __ a teacher. 1. __ is your name?

198 English - Seventh Grade

Listen to the following conversations and fill in

A: Daniel! Good to see you again. __ are things?

Seventh Grade - English 199

1 Which is a formal greeting?

2 Which is an informal greeting?

c) How are you? b) What is your name?

d) Nice to meet you. c) What is your surname?

200 English - Seventh Grade

Seventh Grade - English 201

Enrich your vocabulary

202 English - Seventh Grade

Time to read Conversation and more

Decide whether the following statements are true or false

Seventh Grade - English 203

Conversation and more

2. What kind of a form is it? 2. What does “marital status” mean?

3. Who receives the applications?

Glossary: Go ahead: continue to do or say something.

204 English - Seventh Grade

Enrich your vocabulary Activity 8

When filling out an application form, always

Seventh Grade - English 205

206 English - Seventh Grade

Conversation and more

Seventh Grade - English 207

1 Which is an expression of courtesy?

2 Which is not an expression of courtesy?

208 English - Seventh

Seventh Grade - English 209

Enrich your vocabulary

210 English - Seventh Grade

Enrich your vocabulary

Conversation and more

Now answer the following questions.

1. He a teacher. 1. is your name?